YASKAWA YASNAC J50 Connecting Manual

YASNAC J50

CONNECTING MANUAL

CNC SYSTEM FOR MACHINE TOOLS

BEFORE INITIAL OPERATION, READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS

RETAIN FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.

THOROUGHLY, AND

Y

YASUWJA TOE-C843-12.2B

This manual describes the specifications for connecting YASNAC J50 Series with machines, machine interfaces and external equipment.

Necessary connections to be provided by the machine builder differ depending on the type of the CNC unit supplied by Yaskawa.

Make additions or deletions of connections in accordance with the combination for standard cabinets and integrated units.

The programmable controller system (hereafter called PC) is installed in the YASNAC J50 CNC unit.

For details of the PC, rafer to instruction Manual for

YASNAC J50 PC System (SIE-C843-I 2.1).

YASNAC J50 Operator’s Panel

94C84123

CONTENTS

Page l.

CONFIGURATION.

O. . . ..O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...1

1.1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

I.2STANDARD

CABINETS AND INTEGRATED UNITS .. O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...1

3.cABlNET

construction DEslGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..l

4. CABINET DESIGN FORHEAT FACTORS . . . . . . . . . . .. O.O..O...

. . . . . . . . . . . .. - . . . . . . . . . ...3

4.1 SELECTION OF HEAT EXCHANGER . . . . . . . . . .. s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

4.2 HEAT VALUES OF UNITS..

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3

4.3 DUST-PROOF CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. $. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4

4.4 PROTECTION FROM MAGNETIC INFLUENCES

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

5. PRECAUTIONS FOR INSTALLING SERVO UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6

6. CABLE ENTRANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...7

6.1 LAYOUT OF CABLE CONNECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

6.2 Clamping CABLES AND SHIELDING CABLES• O.OO.O.O... O.. O....• .. O.. O.O.. O.. O.O.O..8

6.3 CONNECTING DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9

7. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...12

7.1 POWER SUPPLY CONNECTIONTO EACH UNITO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

7.2 DETAILS OF CONNECTION..

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

8. CONNECTIONTOOPERATOR’S

8.1 CONNECTION TO EACH UNIT....

PANEL .o . . . . . . . .. o.c. ..o. .o..o.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...13

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

8.2 DETAILS OF CONNECTION.

O.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...14

9.coNNEcTloN

oFMANuAL PuLsEGENERAToR

9.1 CONNECTION TO EACH UNIT....

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..l5

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

9.2 DETAILS OF CONNECTION.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

10. CONNECTION OF INPUT SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...16

10.1 CONNECTION TO EACH UNIT..

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

10.2DETAILS

OF CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

10.3 DETAILS OF SIGNALS..”..

.. ”. .o. .o . . . . . . . . . ..o. o-. o..o..o

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...19

ll.

CONNECTION TO FEED SERVO UNITS . . . . . . . . .. O. . . . . . . . ..O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...20

ll.ICONNECTION

TO EACH UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...20

11.2 DETAILS OFCONNECTION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

12. CONNECTION TO SPINDLE DRIVE UNiT . . . . .. O..O. C. .O. . . .. O.....

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..”29

12.1 CONNECTION TO EACH UNIT...

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...29

12.2 DETAILS OF CONNECTION.

‘ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...34

12.3 CABLE SPECIFICATIONS.

O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...40

13. CONNECTION TO TAPE READER . . .. O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...41

13.1 CONNECTION TO EACH UNIT ““. .. ”. .o. .OOOo. . . .. OOO..o. o.oo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...41

13.2 DETAILS OFCONNECTION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

14. CONNECTION TO RS-232C INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..”..42

14.1

CONNECTION TO EACH UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

14.2

DETAILS OFCONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...42

14.3 RS-232C INTERFACE .O..O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...43

ii

...

Ill

Page

15. DIRECT-IN SIGNAL CONNECTION """" """"""""""""""""'""""""""""""""""""".".""""""" 45

15.1 CONNECTION TO EACH UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. - . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...45

15.2 DETAILS OFCONNECTION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

15.3 DETAILS OF SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...46

16. CONNECTION TOGENERAL-PURPOSE l/OSIGNALS .. ””””.”.....”””””””.....”””””””

16.1 CONNECTION TO EACH UNIT .O. . . . . . . . . . . .. OF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...47

47

16.2 DETAILS OF CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...47

16.3 CONNECTIONTOADDITIONALGENERAL-PURPOSE

16.4 DETAILS OFCONNECTION l/OSIGNALS..O

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

17. CONNECTION TO GENERAL-PURPOSE 1/0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .“” . . ..”” ”””””50

17.1 CONNECTION TO EACH UNIT...

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...50

17.2 DETAILS OF CONNECTION.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...51

17.3 EXPLANATION OF GENERAL-PURPOSE l/OSIGNALSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .“”””.

.”””.

”85

18. CABLES

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

18.1 LIST OF CABLES . . . . .. O.. O.....

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...89

18.2 SPECIFICATIONS OFCABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...91

18.3 LIST OF CONNECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...93

18.4 SHORTING PIN SETUPS..

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...98

19. J50LSTANDARD VOSIGNALS ‘“ ”” .” .o. .o. ” . . .. o. .o . . . ..o . . ..o . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..”” ”....99

19.1 LISTOFNCSTANDARDl/OSIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...99

19.2 DETAILS OF SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...”.”.........””””.” 105

20. J50MSTANDARD VOSIGNALS

20.1

LISTOFNCSTANDARDl/OSIGNALS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...”<.

. . . . . ...””””.” 130

20.2

DETAILS OF SIGNALS ”OO””” . .. ”” oo”o”. .. ”” ”O””” . . . ..””.

”o””.

...”.”””””.””.”.”””””

APPENDIX ADIMENSIONSinmm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...””..........””””..

138

163

APPENDIX Bl/OPORT ADDRESS SETTING "O. "" O""""""• ""..

O""""."".""..• ""O."""""."""" 171

APPENDIX CSTANDARD WIRINGCOLORS OF YASNAC" "O. ".. O"O. O"O"CO.O.".""• "" O.O"O. 174

1. CONFIGURATION

1.1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

The system configuration of YASNAC J50 is shown below.

ASNAC J50

CNC

UNIT

CNC

$IjIP~fTOR S

FEED

Wi:p

~ .-.

—.—

—._

;WJ;LE

UNIT

.—

+=

FEED

MOTOR

I

1

1/0

L_._..Jlll!!E!&-

—.— .

I

L---u

~ i L._.

w;%’.

—._

) +-El i-.-.-.–

MACHINE

EQUIPMENT

Fig. 1.1 System Configuration of

YASNAC J50

2. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

The following conditions are for locations where the control panel is installed by the machine builder.

Therefore, follow Par. 4

“CABINET CONSTRUCTION DESIGN” in the design process so that these conditions will be satisfied.

(1) Ambient Temperature

During operation: O to 45

During storage or transport: -20 to +60

Even if ambient temperature is less than 45, do not install the control panel under direct sunlight, near a heating element or outdoor.

(2) Relative Humidity: 10 to 90 % (Non-condensing)

(3) Vibration: 4.9m/s2 or less during operation

(4) Atmosphere: Do not use the control panel under environment with a lot of dust and dirt or with high density of coolant or organic solvent.

3. CABINET CONSTRUCTION DESIGN

Take the following into consideration when cabinets to contain the

CNC unit and other units are designed.

(1) Make sure that the cabinets are of a totally-enclosed type.

The feed servo unit and spindle drive unit can be open type cabinets provided the following considerations are made:

(a) An air filter is provided at the external air inlet.

(b) Forced air used in the inside is not blown directly on the units.

Direct blowing of air may cause oil mist or dust to settle on the units and might cause failures.

(c) The air discharge outlet should be positioned where dust and oil mist do not enter.

The heat sink of the feed servo and spindle drive units can be installed outside for higher thermal efficiency.

The cabinets should be of a totally-enclosed type to improve reliability.

(2) Design the cabinet so that the difference between the inner-air temperature and ambient temperature is less than 10°C.

Read

Par. 4 for cabinet design to accommodateheat.

(3) Install a fan inside totally-enclosed cabinets to improve the internal cooling efficiency and to prevent localized temperature increases by circulating air inside the cabinets.

The velocity of the circulating air should be greater than 2 m/s on the surfaces of the printed circuit boards.

Forced air should not blow directly on the printed circuit boards.

(4) Provide spacing of more than 100 mm between components and cabinet walls for smooth flow of air.

(5) Seal the cable openings, doors, etc. completely.

The CNC operator’s panel operates at a particular y high voltage and collects dust in the air. Special caution is needed.

The cabinet for mounting the CNC opemtor’s panel requires the following precautions:

(a) Use packing material on the mounting surface to eliminate gaps.

(b) Use packing material in the cable openings and doors.

(6) Magnetic Deflection of CRT Display

CRT displays are sometimes deflected due to external magnetic influences.

Sources that generate magnetic fields, such as transformers, reactors, fans, solenoid switches and relays, and

AC power cables should be positioned more than 300 mm from the CNC operator’s panel.

This distance is optimum and may vary for each circumstance.

Determine the component layout beforehand.

1

3.

CABINET CONSTRUCTION DESIGN

(Cent’d)

(7) To prevent malfunction due to noise, mount the units more than 100 mm from cables feeding 90 VDC or greater, AC power lines, and other components.

The following precautions should be complied with during wiring:

(a) Separate AC and DC cables.

(b) Separate the primary and secondary sides of transformers, line filters, etc.

(8) The front panels of the units that are exposed to the cabinet surfaces, such as the CNC operator’s panel, tape reader, and

PO unit should be of a dustproof type. However, do not install them in locations where cutting fluid may directly splash on them.

Be sure to seal completely around the mounting sections.

(9) Mount the units so as to allow easy checking, removal and reinstalling during maintenance work.

(10) Read the instruction manuals of the feed servo and spindle drive units when mounting them. Heat sink should be installed outside the cabinet to reduce internal thermal losses. This increases the possibilities for a change from an open type to a totally-enclosed type and reduces the capacity of the heat exchanger.

(b) Provide spacing of more than 50 mm in the upper section and

100 mm in the lower section of the unit for better ventilation and easier maintenance.

(c) For ventilation or maintenance, provide spacing more than 50 mm from the upper side and more than 100 mm from the lower side of the CNC unit.

●

Example

4

RADIATOR

FIN

* \

3-+

FEED SERVO AND

PINDLE DRIVE UNITS

J-

AIR

(11) Precautions for Mounting CNC Unit

Observe the following points particularly during mounting of the CNC Unit:

(a) Mount the unit in the direction shown in Fig. 3.1.

(UP)

2 n n

(DOWN)

Fig. 3.1 Mounting of CNC Units

4.

CABINET DESIGN FOR HEAT

FACTORS

4.1

SELECTION OF HEAT EXCHANGER

The cabinets to contain the CNC unit and other units should beef a totally -enclosed type.

The inner-air temperature differential inside the cabinets should be less than 10”C.

Heat exchangers may be needed inside the cabinets depending on the heat generated by the installed electric equipment.

Determine the heat exchanger capacity as follows :

AT: Air temperature rise inside cabinet (“C)

Pv : Total heat generated by electric equipment (W) k : Cabinet heat transmission [W/(m2 . ‘C)]

Calculate based on 6W/(m’ ‘C) if a circulating fan is installed.

A : Effective radiation area of cabinet (m’) qh : Heat exchange ratio of necessary heat exchanger.

1. Calculate the total heat value Pv of the electric equipment.

Pv=Z (Heat value of each unit)

2. Calculate the effective heat radiation area A.

A=2 x {W

(width) x

H (height) } + 2 {W (width) x

D (depth)] + 2 {D (depth) x

H (height))

The surfaces that are not exposed to external air are ineffective areas.

L A A

~ : INEFFECTIVE AREAS

Note : If 50 mm or less from the floor, bottom areas are ineffective.

3. Calculate the allowable heat value Pv’ that ensures the temperature increase within cabinet (AT) to be less than 10°C.

Pv’=k. A. AT (W)

Llo”c

L-

6W (mz. “C)

4. A heat exchanger is not needed if total heat value Pv S allowable heat value Pv’.

5. A heat exchanger has to be installed with the following heat exchange ratio (heat exchanger capacity) qh if total heat value

Pv > allowable heat value Pv’.

qh=

(pv-pv’)/

AT (W/”C)

Llo”c

4.2 HEAT VALUES OF UNITS

4.2.1

NC UNIT

Table 4.1 Heat Values of NC Unit

Unit

CNC Unit*

CNC Operator’s Panel

Tape Reader

1/0 Module

I

I

I

I

Heat Value (W)

103

17

25

5

* Heat value of CNC unit changes by adding the option.

4.2.2

SERVO UNIT

Unit Type

SGDB-

05AD lOAD

15AD

20AD

30AD

44AD

60AD

75AD

1AAD

I

I

I

I

Table 4.2 Heat Value of Servo Unit

Total Heat

Value (W)

50

70

90

130

180

210

370

480

600

I

I

Internal Heat

Value (W)

25

35

45

65

90

105

135

240

300

I

I

Regenerative

Resistance (W)

28

28

28

28

28

28

Notes :

1.The servo unit uses two shafts, and its load factor should be 70 to 80%.

2. The internal heat value is the heat value remaining inside if the heat fin is installed outside.

3. Heat value created by regenerative resistance will differ depending on the frequency of rapid feed starts and stops.

4. Regenerative circuits are incorporated in the unit types SGDB-05 to

1A and are mounted externally for the types SGDB-60 to 1A as options.

5. Capacity of regenerative circuit is calculated by 200% of allowable dissipation.

3

4.3 DUST-PROOF CONSTRUCTION

Particles floating in the air (dust, cuttings, oil mist, etc.) may cause malfunction of the CNC unit and the inner parts of theotherboads

(particularly CRT) to be mounted inside the cabinets the machine manufacturers design and build. The construction of the cabinets, therefore, should be such that it does not allow dust, etc. to enter inside.

(1) The cabinets should be of totally-enclosed construction.

(2) Sealthe cable openings withpacking.

(See Fig.4.1.)

(3) The door and the back cover should be securely sealed with packing.

(See Fig.4.

2.)

(4) Special caution is required for the CNC operator’s panel as it operates at high voltage and collects dust in the air. The following points should be observed with regard to the pendant box used to install the CNC unit.

(a) Seal the cable openings, dooi.” back cover, etc. with packing to eliminate gap.

(b) Packing is attached on the surface where the CNC operator’s panel istobe mounted.

Usethependant boxas it is.

(5) Seal all gaps.

(6) Oil mist easily settles on the ceiling and enters the cabinets through screw holes.

Special precaution, therefore, should be made using oil-proof packing, etc.

(Reference) tochloromene

Neoprene sponge rubber (belongs rubber) isrecommended for the ial.

METAL FITTINGS

PACKINGS

Fig.4.l

Cable Entrance f

PENDANT BOX

Fig. 4.2

Door Packing

PLATE

~NC OPERATOR’S PANE1

Fig.

4.3 CNC Operation’s Panel

4.4 PROTECTION FROM MAGNETIC INFLUENCES

The CRT display may be deflected due to external magnetic influences.

Sources that generate magnetic fields (such as transformers, reactors, fans, electromagnetic switches, solenoid relays, AC power cables) should be kept about 300 mm away from the CRT display.

This distance of 300 mm is a rule of thumb and the optimal distance may differ for each setting.

Therefore, full precaution should be given to location of the above components that generate magnetic fields and determine the final layout after checking the condition of the CRT display.

5

5. PRECAUTIONS FOR INSTALLING SERVO UNIT

(1) The servo unit is a wall-mounted type and should be secured with screws or bolts vertcally (so that the printed circuit boards can be seen from the front).

(See Fig. 5.1.)

(2) Mount the servo unit so as to allow easy checking, removal and reinstalling during maintenance work.

(3) The servo unit generates some amount of heat. A11ow for some space in the upper and lower sides when mounting other units and components so that heat will not saturate the inside the unit.

(See Fig. 5.2.)

(4) Expose the radiator fin outside the cabinet and allow the outside air to blow on it to reduce internal thermal loss. (See Fig. 5.1.)

This will help reduce the capacity of the heat exchanger even when it is required.

(5) When circulating air inside the cabinet, do not allow forced air to blow directly on the servo unit (to prevent dust from collecting on the unit ).

(6) The regenerative resistor generates heat.

Full precautions should be given to location of the regenerative resistor and do not place it near components easily affected by heat because a high temperature develops with extremely high frequency in use such as rapid traverse, start and stop.

(7) Clamp the detector (P.G) cable that enters the servo unit to the ground plate inside the cabinet with the cable clamping fixtures.

(See Clamping Cables and Grounding Cable Shield described in

Par. 6.2.) Make sure to clamp the cable because it is necessary to operate the system properly and to protect it from malfunctioning due to noise.

From .

s

R

ING

Fig. 5.1 Mounting of Servo Unit (Side View) Fig. 5.2 Mounting of Servo Unit (Front View)

6. CABLE ENTRANCE

6.1 LAYOUT OF CABLE CONNECTORS

CNC UNIT TYPE JZNC-JRKOO n

P%l

#

CP50 m

BA

TTERY

SR50

—

4

=3== J

1 r

D o

!

YASNAC

‘R50

1 o m z v

Lc

CN03

01

N e m z o z o m m

SUORCE ~

POWER ON O

+5V0

+24V O

OHT O

F

AiM

]

&

N m z v

CN02

M

01 u

D z z o

CNO1 m z v

M

01

Fig.6.l

Layout of CNC Unit Connectors

7

6.2 CLAMPING CABLES AND SHIELDING CABLES

Of the cables connected to the YASNAC, clamp those that need shielding to the ground plate securely with the cable clamping fixtures as shown in the figure below. This clamping serves not only as cable support but also as cable shielding.

In ensuring safe operation of the system, it is extremely important that you clamp the necessary cables without fail.

(a) Strip part of the cable shield as shown in the figure below to expose the shield enclosure.

Press the exposed part onto the ground plate using the cable clamp.

(b) Mount the ground plate near the cable opening.

(c) Stripping cable enclosure is not required for non-shielded cables for clamping.

CABLE

SHIELD

ENCLOSURE

ABLE CLAMP

TYPE 1

DF8401485

19.5

TYPE 2

DF8404817

-=3252

s2--

‘CABLE

Fig. 6.2 Shielding Cables

6.3 CONNECTING DIAGRAMS

(1) YASNAC J50L (For Lathe)

;ND2

[

ND

200VAC

I

OPERATORS pp

PANEL

& -~

OPERATION PANEL

FOR MACHINES

— .—

~-

CNE

-—

J

JANCD BB51

IE1----i

BATTERY

-—

7

:ND1 c

JANC

BE cl

IC---i

FAN

1 a

POWER SUPPLY

MOOULE

CPS.18FB

CNO1 ~

CN02 D

CN03 r+

PC BOARD

JANCD PC50

CN12 ~

CNAI

CNF

ZNA2

J

-a--l-J

CNA

CN13

~Aif$D

10~lON)

CN1l

~

}

ENET u

@

@l,owER,NpuT,EouENcE,

D

CNM n

D

CNF

CN1O ~

CPU BOARD

JANCD CP50

CN2(

CNA

cl-

S 232C

@

@ p~R TYPE ,APE

=

READER

(OPTION)

[/0 MODULE CONTROL CABINET

OUT 40 PUNTS

CN

1

,N2 ‘iii

IN 8 FOINTS,OUT 8 FONTS p~=’mr-

CN3 @‘

CN4 ‘m

IN 24 POINTS,OUT 16 POINTS

,N40M,NT,

‘

@

IN 40 POINTS

@, q :;; ,@ CN’3

CN14 OUT 32 FONTS

+&f

—.—.

—

L.

DIRECT IN

—-—

II

?

1/0 MODULE

L.—

JANCD. EC860

CN1l

CN12

CN13

CN14

.—.

::;

CN3

,N4

CN5

CN6 a

U

Zt

J d-t

‘@‘

@

‘e

B

‘*‘

C61 Kfl CONTROL CAB! NET

L.

;:I;::UT8WINTS

IN 24 FtlNTS, OUT 16 POINTS

,NWPO,NTS

:;:::Ts r o

CNO

,Xls 80AR0

ANCD.SR50.

1

CN30 ~

+

1/0 MODULE

JANCD ?C861

CN1

CN1l

CN12

F a

CONTROL

.—

IN 24 POINTS,OUT 16 POINTS

CN31

E r ,N2 @~

IN 24 POINTS,OUT 16 POINTS

I

[-

CN13

/+ ]h

:.:.*:Y:Y ill

Fig. 6.3

9

(2) YASNAC J50L (For Multi-axis Lathe)

200VAC

I

I e-

PANEL

7

I

OPERATION PANEL

I

\CKBOARD

CN

ICt---l

___

JANCD !3B51

BATTERY

IH

FAN

I

AN(

B

—

L--

:ND

:NA

:ND

ZNA

CN

(

Imd=+#

1

PC BOARD

I

,mQ

CNA

CN13

JANCD-

MM51

(OWION)

CN1l

~j

CN M

!

CNF

CN1O n

&

~

I

YENET

‘T.

@

@

@

II

,POwERINPuTs,OUEN~ ‘

1/0 MOOULE

~-7d_

CN1l

4-

@’ ;

CN12

l----v

:::

CN3

W::I:::UT8POINT$

@

CONTROL CABINET

IN 24 POINTS,OUT 16 POINTS lop’

2 - -

@

‘+ CN’3

CN14

CN4

.H

:; ti n

-w

‘@’

@

~%

,N40POINT,

‘N40m’NTs

OUT 32 POINTS

DIRECT1“

(OPTION)

OCNE

JANCD-SR51

F c“” P=

-%

CN12

CN13

CN14

CN3

CN4

CN5

CN6 a

@

‘@‘

@

C62 r

1/0 MOOULE If~ CONTROL CABINET

N 8 POINTS,OUT 8 POINTS

IN 24 POINTS,OUT 16 POINTS

,N40,01NTS

,N40POINT,

32 POINTS

CN33

CN32

1P

n~

1ST AXIS ORIVE @ /jlX~NOLE

SPINDLEPG pG (OPTION)

+jcN’

P

‘No‘x’s

2NDSPINDLE

4-

1/0 MODULE

JANCD-~C8~:1

CN1l

CN12

~~–-~

,N,

CN14

,N3~Dl@~

‘lo

@

CONTROL CABINET r-—-–

IN 24 POINTS,OUT 16 POINTS

IN 24 PilNTS, OUT 16 POINTS

IN 16 POINTS,OUT 24 POINTS

4$=--RPINDLEP:(:---”” ‘----

Fig. 6.4

(3) YASNAC J50M (For Machining Centers)

200VAC

I

OPERATION PANEL

FOR MACHINES

.—-—

.—

OPERATOR’S

——-—

PANEL

-=

CNB CNC

V-K E

Ctil c

ANC

BE c

JANCD BB51

BATTERY \

FAN

J

CNA

CNA

CNI

i

...

MM51

IOPTIONI

CN1l

,ml,u-

b“

0

i —’

. . .. . . .. . . .. . .

$~~fi

..””,” ,.!’., >,..,,,.,

I n ,-.,, ”

@$ ‘ ~l~~fl~cNIOp”~

CPU BOARD

JANCDCP50

CN20

CNA

CND n

~ o

CND

(OPTION)

CNE

X15 BOARD

JAN CD-3R51 L

CN36

l_._~.J

L--------

@l

1/0 MOOULE

,r JANC6.FC81O

CN1

CN1l

@ vxs

CN’2 ::: @

,N4 ‘@

@

CN’3 ::

CONTROL CABINET

.—

;“,40,0,,,,

:::’’,0:::’,,

,N40POINT;

,:’’”40’0’”’s

OUT 32 FYIINTS

.—

II

L-.— ._.>

OIRECTIN f-w”

1“0 MOOULE _ CONTROL CABINET

f~~

?

L.—-

CN12

CN3

~N4

E

‘e a

CN5 am e

C62 ‘

1“ 8 POINTS,OUT 8 POINTS

IN 24 POINTS,OUT 16 POINTS

,N40POINTS

IN40 P!INTS

CN13

CN14

—.2

CN’ *0uT32p0’NTs

L.

—.

—.—..—

CONTROL CABINET 100 MOOULE

-h=bla==is

II

z-AXIS DRIVE

CN33

b~nm REGlsToR z-4xls MoTol

.E PG (OPTION)

CND

LT–

Fig. 6.5

11

12

7. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

7.1 POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION TO EACH UNIT

7.2 DETAILS OF CONNECTION

CNC UNIT

CPS-18FB

172039-1

G

3

4 m w

7

CN 03

I

Fig. 7.1

SUPPLY

:Ps

1 f 15°A

SINGLE-PHASE

200/220/230VAC

!i13/IW)H7 +2Hz

580VAC

T

NOTE: The power supply is designed to function normally even in the event of l/2-cycle or shorter momentary power loss or 1-cycle or shorter 50% voltage drop.

Fig. 7.2 Power Supply Connection

8. CONNECTION TO OPERATOR’S PANEL

8.1 CONNECTION TO EACH UNIT

10220

JANCD-PC50

CNIZ

1

C12

1012O-3OOOVE

CNC OPERATOR’S PANEL

I

JAN CD-SP50

+

01’D3000VE

CN2

10220-6202J L

+

1 -1782W5

3

4 +24V

5 O,,v

CN3 PIN

POSITION

172040-1

Ka%zl

CPS.18FB

CNO1

Col

172026-1

Fig. 8.1

8.2 DETAILS OF CONNECTION

CNC UNIT

TYPE JANCD-PC50

-_—-

CN 12-4

CN 12-5

I

‘1

I

SIG

* SIG

11

II

/ P,

!

~.

OPERATOR’S PANEL

-—

I

,

TYPE JANCD-SP 50

CN2-4

CN2-5

3

4’

“ P

-t--=h+

CN 12-13 POFF

II

CN 2-13

i

~___J

CN 12-16

CN 12-17

CN 12-20 r TYPE CPS-18F8

.

CNOI - 1

CNO14

CN 12-12

CN 12-1

CN 12-2

CN 12-8

CN 12-9

CN 12-18

CN 12-19

2 PCOM

VIDEO

* vIDEO

HLGT

* HLGT

HSYNC

: HSYNC

II

II

I ~1

II

I pl

II

I pl

!

CN 2-12

CN 2-I

CN 2-2

CN2-8

CN2-9

CN2 -18

CN 2-19

E

I

VSYNC

; VSYNC

FG

II

I pl

(1

*1

!/

1

CN Z-16

CN 2-17

CN 2-20

CN3-1

CN 3-2

~:

+24V

CNO1-3

,.

-—3

CNO1-5

; ~ 1;

‘~

CN3-4

CN 3-5

PON CNB -18

14

POWER ON

POWER OFF

*

Vertical type CNC contains a power ON/OFF switch.

A special external circuit does not have to be provided.

Notes:

1. The shield enclosure does not have to be grounded outside.

2. Power ON/OFF can be selected by the panel power ON/OFF (POF) and/or remote power ON/OFF (EOF) by a shorting plug.

Sw

2

Setting in Main board model JANCD-PC50

1

~o 3 + EoF

(INEFFECTIVEIEFFECTIVE

NV 3

POFF

PCOM

I

CNB-19

CNB -20

L

SW2, SW3 Setting

.—

.

‘w’

Panel/Power RemotePower Panel and Remote

ONIOFF(POF)ONIOFF(EOF) PowerONIOFF

OFFION

‘m’

OFF/ON OFFION

‘m’ ‘ma

lm13 1m3

Sw

3 1m]3

1 o~ 3 + ~g:FEcTlvE,EFFEcTlvE)

Settings prior to factory shipment

Fig.

8.2

Connecting Power Unit (Type CPS-18FB) and PC Board to CNC Operator’s Panel (CRT/P)

(Type JANCD-PC50)

9.

CONNECTION OF MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR

9.1 CONNECTION TO EACH UNIT

—

CNC OPERATOR’S PANEL

-~

JANCD-SP50

10220-6202JL

1 OVH 11

CN 1

ID

Clol

I

I

7

8

9

10

17 *PAH

18 PBH

19 *PBH

20 FG

Fig. 9.1

15

9.2 DETAILS OF CONNECTION

(1) 1st Manual Pulse Generator

10. CONNECTION OF INPUT SEQUENCE

10.1 CONNECTION TO EACH UNIT

CNC UNIT

—

I +

L.-1,

_.—

CNC OPERATOR’S

PANEL

L-.—

(OPENCOLLECTORfi UT]

No 1 MANUAL PUI

GENERATOR (1 HP

;E

1)

“pE r

‘:fpj

,..

PI CN 1-6 +Wi

CN 1-4 +5VH

CN 1-1 OVH : p:

CN 1-16 PBH : :

%

[

CN 1-2 OVH

CN 1-18 PBH

CN 1-3 OVH

1P,

: :

‘7 p,’

—.

----

~pfm

I

2 s

4

L._._

;&:E~PERATOR’S p~

OUTP ITI

No. 1 MANUAL PULSE

GENERATOR II HPG) r-—”—”—

TYPE JANCD-SP50

.“7

CN 1-16 PAH r-”

CN 1-17 * PAH

CN 1-18 . PBH I

CN 1-19.*PBH I

I

CN1-), OVH

1

CN 1-20 FG

:-,,

!!

1

Notes:

1. The HPG power supply is a constant +5V.

2. An open collector (cable length 5 m or less) or differential output (cable length 5 m or more) can be used for HPG output.

3. Shielded cables are not needed if the cable lengths are less than 1 m.

Twisted-pair cables can be used.

Use twisted-pair shielded cables if the cable lengths are more than 1 m and ground the cable shield enclosure using a ground plate inside the panel or CN 1-20 pins (FG).

JANCD-PC59

1OZO-52A2JL

1

2

5

6

3

4

7 TON

8

9 s

10

11 +24VT

12 TCOM

13 ‘OFF

14

15

16 *TOLO

17 SVMX

18 NCMX

19 *TESP

20 FG

CN1”

MAIN CIRCUIT

D

Qwl

1012O-3W3VE

Fig.

10.1

POWER ON

INTERFACE s.ivm

(~BRAKE UNIT

%,,,5,23=-

FEED SERVO UNIT (MAIN CIRCUIT)

50/60Hz

FEED SERVO UNIT (CONTROL CIRCUIT)

=TAPEREADER

10.2 DETAILS OF CONNECTION

—.

-~

CNC UNIT rYPE

,IANCD-PC50

CN II-I

CN 11-1[

NC

POWER ON

Ov r

0“ CN1l -1’

CN1l-1

CN 11- 1[ ,* TOI.D

*

SVMX

TESP

SVMX

SERVO

POWER ON

EMERGENCY

Ft!?!!

OVERLOAD INPUT

(NORMALLY NOT

USED)

CN1l-7 TON

CN 11-1: TCOM

“7

J-

CNII -1: TOFF

EXTERNAL

POWER ON

CN1l-2 FG

.-—_—

Fig. 10.2 Connecting Input Sequence to PC Board

(Type JANCD-PC50)

The connection example of the PC board is shown below.

200/220/230VAC,

RSTE

1-

K

NCMX

SVMX

50/60Hz

‘“”v’c ~ n

NCM

)

NC POWER ON

(LJSe Contactor equivalent to Hi. ) m SVM SERVO POWER ON

(Use contactor eqwalent capawy according to H1.

to the servo

Determine unit, etc. ) contact

\

II

-u----s

Rs

TO FEED SERVO UNIT

I

‘L Ts

IL

1!

———— ——— ———

1:5 svnJlx k=+ EMERGENCY

I i–-—_—

‘

-i

:=:]

I BRAKE POWER SUPPLY

OPR1O9A TYPE FOR 200/220VAC INPUT

/ [OPR1O9F TYPE FOR IOOVAC INPUT

1

:––– ——=—––”-” —u---->

NCMX

STOP PB

MOTOR

.—

BRAKE 1

I

,

I

I

I

I

~NOte’

Required only for using holding brake.

The brake is built m the motor.

Rts:FEEDsERvO”N’T

TAPE READER

Fig. 10.3

10.3 DETAILS OF SIGNALS

10.3.1

NC POWER ON

ON

(SVMX)

(NCMX)

AND SERVO POWER

(1) NCMX: This output is turned ON when the logic circuit of the control is energized.

(2) SVMX: This output is turned ON when the servo unit is energized.

With an external servo unit, turn ON the power supply when this signal is outputted.

(3) The power supply turning ON sequence is as follows:

(a) Close the power supply main switch for the control.

(b) Either push the POWER ON button on the CNC operator’s panel, or close the circuit between EON and ECM.

Then, the logic circuit and the servo control circuit are both energized, and the circuit between NCMX (NC power input and output) is closed.

10.3.2

EMERGENCY STOP (TESP) INPUT

When the circuit between emergency stop input terminals (TESP) is open, the control stops totally the servo power supply is turned off, and the emergency stop output (* ESPS) of general purpose 1/0 module is opened.

10.3.3

EXTERNAL POWER ON-OFF (EON, EOF,

ECM) INPUT

The control can be switched on and off by external input signals, in the same way as the depressing of the POWER ON/OFF buttons on the CNC operator’s panel. When the circuit between EON and

ECM is closed, the logic circuit or servo power of the control is energized.

When the circuit between EOF and ECM is opened, the logic circuit or servo power of the control is deenergized.

:

With an external servo unit, design the servo control circuit power input sequence so that the circuit is energized at the output of NCMX signals.

:

(c) Again make the same power switching (pushing the POWER

ON button or closing the circuit between EON and ECM).

Now, the servo power supply is turned ON, and the circuit between SVMX (servo power input and output) is closed.

SERVO

POWER SUPPLY

Fig. 10.5 External Power ON-OFF

:

With an external servo unit, design the servo power circuit power input sequence so that the circuit is energized at the output of SVMX signals.

:

(d) When the external circuit is ready after the circuit between

SVMX is closed, and the control becomes ready, close the

MRD (machine ready) input of the 1/0 module.

Then, RDY is displayed on the CRT, and operation becomes possible.

10.3.4

OVERLOAD (*TOLD) INPUT

Short-circuit T24(CN1116) if this input is not used. (Normally this input is not used.)

POW;: ON

NCMX

(OUTPUT)

SVMX

(OUTPUT)

MRD

(INPUT) n

\

n

I

+

:~p~:tEEN

ALARM CODE

“31 o“

,

:;;FW:;EEN

ALARM CODE

“280

i_

;YSCCYREEN

‘“ROY” DISPtAY

Fig. 10.4 Time Chart of Power Supply

Turning on Sequence

20

11. CONNECTION TO FEED SERVO UNIT

11.1 CONNECTION TO EACH UNIT

(1) For Lathe

CNC UNIT

— —

JANCDSR51 1

FEED SERVO UNIT

SGDB TYPE

CN1

8 Ps

9

10

*PS

1025O-52A2JL

1 PGOV

2 PGOV

3 PGOV

4 PG5v

5 PG5V

6 PG5V

7 DIR

❑ 1022O.52A2JL

11 BAT

12 BAT+

13 BAT–

14 PC5

15 *PC5

16 PA5

17 *PA5

I

18 PB5

19 *pB5

20 FG

CN2 PIN LAYOUT

CN2

(3RD AXIS)

1

~

C360

1o120-

3000VE a

PG

FEED MOTOR

JAN CD SR502

10226 -52A2JL

CN33

In

10226 -52A2JL

—

CN31

1

)126 -30d0 E

L

C31

FEED SERVO UNIT

SGDB TYPE

(2ND AXIS)

1 n

C31 o

1o120-

3000VE

FEED MOTOR

CN30 d

PG

—

1

SGDB TYPE

J

II

II

b iO150-3000VE

‘1 CN

1

1

1025O-52A2JL

1 PGOV

2 PGOV

3 PGOV

4 PG5V

5 PG5V

,6 PG5V

7 DIR

8 Ps

9 * Ps

10

CN2 PIN LAYOUT

(1ST AXIS

CN2

10220-52A2J L ll]BATI

121BAT+

13 BAT–

14 Pcl

15 * pcl

16 PAI

17 *PA1

18 PB1

19 * PB1

20 FG

C300 1

1o120-

3000VE

n

FEED MOTOR

PG

G

Fig. 11.l

Cable Connection between lst Axis and3rd Axis

(2) For Machining Centers

CNC UNIT

—

I

7

(

I

I

I

II

FEED SERVO UNIT

FEED MOTOR SGDB TYPE (4TH AXIS)]

CN

1

1025O-52A2JL

CN2

1022O-52A2JL

1 PGOV 11 BAT I

2 PGOV 12 BAT+

3 PGOV 13 BAT–

4 PG5V 14Pc5

5 PG5V 15 *PC5

6 PG5V 16PA5

7 DIR 17 *PA5

8 PS

9 *PS s

10

16 PB5

19*PB5

20 FG

CN2 PIN LAYOUT h C360

1o120-

3000VE la

10226

10226-52A2J L

—

JAN CD-SR50-2

FEED SERVO UNIT I

CN3:

CN31

I I

w

-d

1015O-3OOOVE

SGDE TYPE

1

+

1~

C33-1

10126-30 OVE

C31

10126-30d0 E

1015O-3OOOVE

I

CNI

1025O-52A2JL

8 Ps

9 * Ps

10

!: (3RD AXIS)

CN2

1022O-52A2JL

1 PGOV 11 BAT I

2 PGOV 12 BAT+

3 PGOV 13 BAT–

4 PG5V 14 PC3

5 PG5V 15 * PC3

6 PG5V 16 PA3

7 DIR 17 * PA3

18 P B3

19 * pB3

20 FG

CN2 PIN LAYOUT

SGDE TYPE

(2ND AXIS)

CN1

1025O.52A2JL

CN2

1022O-52A2JL

I

L

IF%

1o120-

3000VE

A n

PG

C31O b

1o120-

3000VE

4

FEED MOTOR

FEED MOTOR

-—

CN3C

—

9

1

10126-300

C30

8 PS

9 *PS

10

E

CN2 PIN LAYOUT

I

II

SGDB TYPE L

1015O-3OOOVE

CNI I

10250-52A2J L s

1 PGOV 11 BAT I

2 PGOV 12 BAT+

3 PGOV 13 BAT–

4 PG5V 14PC1

5 PG5V 15 *PC1

6 PG5V 16PA1

7 DIR

6 PS

9 *PS

:N2

(1ST AXIS)

CN2

1022O-52A ,2JL

17 *PA1

16 PB1

19*PB1

PIN2:Y:UT

17 *PA2

18 PB2

19*PB2

20 FG

Fig. 11.2 Cable Connection between lst Axis and4th Axis r

I

C300 b

1o120-

3000VE

L

FEED MOTOR d

PG d

PG u u

21

11.2 DETAILS OF CONNECTION

(1) For Lathe

22

~ R REGENERATIVE

3-PHASE

200 TO 230VAC

RI S1 T1

: ~

:y,

—

—

R3 S3 T3

1ST AXIS

~-

FEED MOTOR

B

R

)2 J2 I

CNC UNIT

JANCD-SR51)-1, .3

‘-~

DA1

:::: :;; GND(DA)

1ST

(Xls

:ONTROL

,-1

11P

+24 VEX

CN30-2

IF’

CN30-14 ~G~ m

CN30 -4

L

GND(/TGOh

~++~:::::

CN30 -5

SRDY1

CN30-6

GND6RDY

CN30-7

{ cN30 -1 < 3 cN30-1

* OL1

1P

M

GND(*OL; cN30 -1

*ALM1

CN30-8

GNDMALM

CN30-9

I

CNI 5

CN 1 6

CN1-47

CN1-40

CN1-29

CNI-30

SGDB TYPE

CN2-16

CN2-17

CN2-18

CN2-19

CN2-14

CN2-15 u v w

E.

u v

‘w

EP

W 1

I

I

I

I

> P

P

Ii

11+5

0s

N

P

R

H

G

M J

/

CN30-

CN30-

CN30.

CN30-2

CN30 -16

CN30-1

CN30-1

4 PA 1

*PA1

CN30-17

PB 1

*PB1

Pc 1

*PC1

CN30.

I

GND

1

GND

2

FG ~

+q

L b

4

1P

P

::::

CN1-19

CN1-20

CN11

CN1- 2

CN2- 7

CN2 -20 s

P

II

>J

(

J

CN30-25 ‘ND2

I

F

i-----_.

Fig. 11.3 Connection to Feed Servo Unit (lst Axis)

2R REGENERATIVE CIRCUIT r’—

2ND AXIS

FEED MOTOR

3-PHASE

200 TO 230VAC : ~$% r-

I

CNC UNIT

JANCD-SR50-L,

CN 31-22

CN 31-21

CN 31-14

CN 31-4

CN31-5

ND

,Xls

CN31-6

“ONTROLCN31-7

CN 31-12

CN 31-13

CN 31 -IO

CN 31-11 cN31.8

CN31-9 cN 31-26,

-—

DA2

GND (DA)

+24VE>

/SVON

/TGoN

GNDflGOl

SRDY2

GND6RD)

* OL2

GND(*OL

* ALM2

GND(*ALJ

IF’

1P

%=

~~

II

II

II

,.

I

7

CN1-5

CN1-6

CN1-47

CN1-40 l--j---+ CN1-27

CN1-28

CN1-29

CN1-30

CN2-16

CN2-17

CN2-18

CN2-19

CN2 -14

CN2-15

p-

CN 31-16

CN 31-15

CN 31-18

CN 31.17

CN 31-20

CN 31-19

CN31.

I

CN312

CN31-

FG

3

PA 2

*PA2

PB z

*PB2

Pc 2

*PC2

GND

GIVD

*

*

&

,/

P

CN1-33

CN1-34

CN1-35

CN1-36

CN1-19

CN1-20

CN11

CN1- 2

CN2- 7

CN2-20.

CN 31-23.24

+5V EX

CN 31-25

GND2

i---__

I

-—

Fig. 11.4

Connection to Feed Servo Unit (2nd Axis)

3R REGENERATIVE CIRCUIT

3RD AXIS

~-—

FEED MOTOR

I s

T

SGDB TYPE v w

E

3-PHASE

200 TO 23OVAC : ~:% ‘3 la

T3

R22

+

CNC UNIT

-1

JANCD-SR51

—.

II

,-,

CN 36-22

CN 36-21

CN 36-26

~N 3614

DA5

GND(DA) I I p

+24 VEX

/SVON5 I

/TGON5

CN 36-4

GND~GON)

CN36-5

%

SRDY5

:oNTRoLCN

CN36-6

36-7 {

%

GND($RDY)I

I,fl

CN 36-12<< i p

P cN36-13~*oL5 ; \

:;:;::=I cN36-8

CN36-9

\ [

* ALM5 I I

GND(*ALM)

II

II

II

II

II

I

11P

1+1

PA5

CN 36-16

*PA5

CN36-15

CN36-18

PB 5

~~j

*PBS

CN 36-17

CN 36-20 ‘ *PPCC55

CN 36-19

I

P

P

1 1 p i

I

CN1-5

CN1-6

CN1-47

CN1-40

CN1-27

CN1-28

CN1-29

CN1-30 cN1-31

CN1-32

CN1-33 cN1-34

CN1-35 cN1-36

CN1-19

CN2-16

CN2-17

CN218

CN2-1’3

CN2-14.

CN2- 15

(+5)

(0s)

CN24

CN21

CN2-!

CN2-:

N2-I

E

N2-:

CN2- 7

CN2-20

:::::-::::

CN36-

!/

FG

3 <

+--l-

{ j

I

I

~

CN 36-25 ‘ND’

1

‘L--- .–

—.

Fig. 11.5 Connection to Feed Servo Unit (3rd Axis)

(2) For Machining Centers

1 R REGENERATIVE CIRCUIT

3-PHASE

200 TO 230VAC : ;$Y,

RI S1 T1 R3 S3 T3

% war

NCM

I

=-’

JANCD -SR 50.z

—-—

II

.—

DA1

CN30 -22

1ST dxls

:ONTROL

I

CN30-21 < ~,~~;;

CN30 -2

CN30-14 /’voN

/TGON

CN30 -4

i!i-

GND(tTGO!

CN30 -5

SRDY1

CN30 -6

GNDtSRDY

CN30 -7

CN30-1 < ]1

,[

II cN30-1 cN30 -1

*OL1

CN30-8

CN30-9

GND(*OL

*ALIMI

II

II

GND[*AIA k

II

/

,

CN30-1

CN30 -16

4

CN30 2d

PA I

*PA I

CN30-1 +~B~

CN30-17

*PB1

Pc 1

*PC1

CN30. I

GND

CN30. 1

GND

CN30- 2

CN30.

<

FC +——————

~J

4

FG

!/

II

II

11P

=!

k::::

P

-

1P

P

}

1

CN30-2

(

:N

33.2i24

-/

r

I

‘ND2

I

1

‘

L-

I

r

CN1-31

CN1-32

CN1-33 cN1-34 cN1-19

CN1-20

CN11

CN1- 2

SGDB TYPE

(+5)c~&

(0,)

CN2-:

CN2-2

CN2-(

CN2-:

E

CN2- 7.

CN2-20<

.–

UA v<)

W(1

E<

~-

1ST AXIS

FEED MOTOR

AU

.V

.J w

. .E

Fig. 11.6 Connection to Feed Servo Unit (1st Axis)

25

3-PHASE

200 T0230VAC:\g%

R3

S3

I

T3

:=1

R22

R s

T

Sv 2

CIRCUIT

P

2P REGENERATIVE -n

B-

—km

I

2ND AXIS

FEED MOTOR

_CNC UNIT

LNCD - SR 50-2

—“~

-—

+

~

,

4P

P

P

CN1-5

}

CN1-6 cNI-47

CN1 -40

CN1-27

CN1-28

CN1-29

CN1-30

CN31-12

CN31-13

CN31-10

CN31.11

<

< 1

&=

#llQl cN31.8

CN31-9

& i

_

SGDB TYPE

CN2-

CN2-

CN2-

CN2-

CN2-

CN2-

*

+

+=/

iI& iii

CN1-19

CN1-20

/

CN11

CN1- 2 cN2cN2-

—--J

CN31-25

\ t-

‘N’

L---

Fig. 11.7 Connection to Feed Servo Unit (2nd Axis)

3R REGENERATIVE CIRCUIT

;O~H%E230VAC~;

R3

@0 S3

E

T3

R22 s 22 s

—.

CNC UNIT

-.

ANCD - SR 50-2

“-~

DA3

(-!

CN 33-$2

[1P

CN33-21 ~~;j

CN 33.26

IF’

CN33-14 ~G~

CN33-4 k

CN33-5

SRDY3

%

CN33-6

GND(SRDY

:ONTROLCN 33-7 f +——————

CN33-12~

CN 33-13<:*OL3

CN 33-10

CN33-11

II

II

GND(*OL;

[1

%

~

il

* ALM3

1P cN33.8

II

GND($ALM

CN33-9

GNDtTGOh l-f

I

E/

II

II

II

II

II

PA 3

CN 33-16

*PA3

CN 33-15

PB 3

CN 33-18

*PB3

CN 33-17

I E

CN33-20

CN 33-19

CN33.

1 i *:C33

GND

GND

CN332

CN33- 3 <

FG G—————— k g

P

I

CN1-5

CNI-!5

CN1-47

CN1-40

CN1-27

CN1-28

CN1-29

CNI-30

CN1-31

CN1-32

CN1-33

CN1-34

%::

CN1-19

CN1-20

CN11

1

CN1- 2

I

SV3

I------P

R s

T r t n

SGDB TYPE

!3-1 u v w

E

1=1%

(

I

I r-— u v w

E

3RD AXIS

FEED MOTOR

SM -I

I

=:-ii

CN2-1

CN2- 18

CN2-14

CN2-15

P

IIPCE pA l-,

1~~

P *PB

I *pc>F

D

I“”b’

II

1/ f!

II

1/

II

““’Ow-llJ

PG

~

I

~

\

L_

-1

_.J

CN32-25 ‘ND2 r 1

-—

Fig. 11.8 Connection to Feed Servo Unit (3rd Axis)

3-PHASE

200 TO 230VAC : ~:%

I

R22 r s 22 t

{+

_CNC UNIT

I

-—

JANCD - SR 51

~-~

4TH

AXIS

CONTROL

CN

CN

CN

CN

CN

CN

CN

CN

DA5

36-22

GND(DA)

36-21

+24VEI

36-26

36.14

/SVON!

36-4

L

36-5

36-6

36-7 i

CN 36-12 < $

CN 36.10

,-,

11P

1P

/TGON

GNDVTGO} t--+---+ CN1-27

SRDY5

GNDkWDY

%

T=

,1

CN1-28

,1

II

I

CN1-5 cN1-’f’

CN1-47

CN1-40

CN1-30

CN1-29

I

CN36-11 cN36.8

GND(*OL

* ALM5

GND($ALh!

k%:;

CN36-9

II

[1

II

II

II

PA 5

CN 36-16 CN1-33

*PA5

[[p p

CN 36-15

PB 5

CN1-34

CN 36-18

I ‘ p ? ::; ”J;

CN 36-17

1

*PB5

Pc 5

CN 36-20 CN1-19

*PC5

Cii36-19 k

GND

CN1-20

CN361 CN11

GND

CN362 &&

:’

CN1 - 2

CN363 <

~

FG ~

CN2-18

CN2-19

I

‘::;c:~::c

N2-’i

N2-6

N2-3

E

CN2- 7,

CN2-20~

I I

1

..J

{

I

CN36-25 ‘ND’ k

L--._

Fig. 11.9 Connection to Feed Servo Unit (4 th Axis)

I

[

I

I

(1) Connection and Motor Rotating Direction

Forward Connection Reverse Connection

Direction of

Motor Rotation if “+” moving command is given.

o

FLANGE

SURFACE

OF MOTOR

Ccw

g

o

Cw

The connection diagram shows forward connection.

Connect wires as shown below for reverse connection.

Line Filter Type

LF31O

LF320

LF330

LF340

I

Current per Phase of Input Power Supply

10A max

20A max

30A max

40A max

(4) Connection to Motor with Brake

SINGLE PHASE

100/200 VAC

SVMX

1=--

EMERGENcY

STOP pUSHBUTTON

. Do not short-circuit output terminals 3 and 4.

. Tightly fasten terminal board screws.

.Protective

devices are built-in.

External protectors arenot needed.

. The contact making and breaking current for terminals 5 and 6 shallbe5 to 10times therated current of the brake to be used.

Use DC make-break contacts.

(2) Combination of Drive Unit and Regenerative Resistor

Servo Drive Type

CACR-

SR03SB

SR05SB

SRI OSB

SRI 5SB

SR20SB

SR30SB

SR44SB

Regenerative Resistor installed

SeDaratelvTvi3e MO-

70W-50k (or 30SH, 300W 100Q)

70W-50k (or 30SH, 300W 100Q)

70W–5flk

70W-50k

140W-25k

140W–25k*

140W-25k*

*Two registers connected in parallel,

(3) Line Filter Installation

(a) A line filter is installed to prevent radio interference by high frequency generated by the servo drive unit.

(b) Select the appropriate filter as follows depending on the current per phase of the drive unit input power supply.

12. CONNECTION TO SPINDLE

DRIVE UNIT

12.1 CONNECTION TO EACH UNIT

(1) For Motor with Built-in PC

(a) For lathe

CNC UNIT

—

(b) For multi-axis lathe

CNC UNIT

JANCD-SR50-1

10226-52A2JL

1 GND

2 GND

3 GND

4 +5 VEX

5 +5 VEX

6 +5 VEX

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14 PC3

15 * PC3

16 PA3

17 $ PA3

18 PB3

19 * PB3

20 FG

CN32

CN33

1OI26-3OOOV

C33 17 uR -

%FO1 (G)

+~—

4

Ih”’’o”’ooov’

~OM!Y(G)

CN1

CN2

CIMR-VM3

1 Ov

2 Ov

3 Ov

4 +5V

(1ST

11 ccl

12 CA1l

13 CA21

14 Pcs 1

!

SPINDLE’

5 + 5V 15 * Pcsl

CN3

6 + 5V

7 SG

16 PAS1

17 * PAS1

8 THSAI

9 THSE1

10 24V

18 P8S1

19 * PBS1

20 FG

ID C320

MR-

1

PG a SPINDLE

MOTOR

—

Fig. 12.1

——

JAN CD-SR50-3

1022652A2J L CN33

0126”3000vP

‘

8

9

H

10

1 GND

2 GND

3 GND

4 +5 VEX

5 +5 VEX

: +5 VEX

11

12

13

14 PC3

15 *PC3

16 PA3

17 *PA3

18 PB3

19 *PB3

20 FG

CN32

0120 -3000vE

OR-

IFO1 (G

CN1

CIMR-VM3

(1ST SPINDLE

U[

U[

4R-

>MOl(G

CN2

1 Ov

2 Ov

3 Ov

4 +5V

5 +5V

6 +5v

7 SG

8 THSA1

9 THSB1

CN3

11 ccl

12 CA1l

13 CA21

14 PCS1

15 * PCS1

16 PAS1

17 * PAS1

18 PBS1

19 * PBS1

20 FG

IARiOFOl(G)

L a

PG

SPINDLE

MOTOR

1

CN%

0126 -3000V

10220 52A2JL

1 GND

2 GND

3 GND

4 +5 VEX

5 +5 VEX

6 +5 VEX

.:

,9

10

11

12

13

14 PC4

15 * PC4

16 PA4

17 * PA4

18 PB4

19 * PB4

20 FG

CN34

1P

0120 -3000VE

[

!R -

CN 1

CIMR-VM3

(2ND SPINDLE u u

4R-

)MOl(G)

CN2 CN3

1 Ov

2 Ov

3 Ov

4 +5V

5 +5V

11CC2

12CA12

13CA22

14PCS2

6 +5v

7 SG

8 THSA2

15 * PCS2

16 PAS2

17 * P4S2

18 PBS2

9 TI+SB2 19 * PBS2

20 FG

I

10

C340

1

PG

KI

Fig. 12.2

(c) For machining centers

CNC UNIT

— —

JAN CD-SR50-2

10226-52A2JL

8

9

1 GND

2 GND

3 GND

4 +5VEX

5 +5 VEX

; +5 VEX

11

12

13

14 PC4

15 *PC4

16 PA4

17 *PA4

18 PB4

19 *PB4

20 FG

CN35

CN34

C35

lD-

31263000L

I

MR -

b

C34 ‘%

MR -

[

[

CN 1

CIMR-VM3

(SPINDLE)

CN2

1 Ov

2 Ov

3 Ov

4 +5V

5 +5V

6 +5v

7 SG

B THSA1

9 THSB1

11 ccl

12 CA1l

13 CA21

14 Pcsl

15 * Pcsl

16 PAS1

17 *PAS I

18 PBS1

19 $ PBS1

20 FG

CN3

MR-

20F01(G)

L

PG c SPINDLE

MOTOR

— .—

Fig. 12.3

(2) For Mortor with Separately Installed PC

(a) For lathe

CNC UNIT

—

JAN CD-SR50-1

CN33

-~

IF

0126 -3000VE

L.

)FO1(G)

CN 1

CIMR-VM3

(1ST SPINDLE) fl[

CN2 CN3

[ tiR-

‘n

C320

E

PG

10220-52A2J L

1 GND

2 GND

,3 GND

4 +5 VEX

,5 +5 VEX

6 +5 VEX

,;

:0

11

12

13

14 PC3

15 * PC3

16 PA3

17 * PA3

18 PB3

19 * PB3

20 FG

CN32

—

C32-1 lb

0120-3000V r

L

!-J u

MS310BB-29S n

SPINDLE PULSE

‘ENERATOR

G

Fig. 12.4

(b) For multi-axis lathe

CNC

UNIT

—

JAN CD-SR50-3

10226-52A2J L CN33

10126 -3OOOVE

C32-1

CN 1

CIMR-VM3

(1ST SPINDLE

CN2

1 Ov

2 Ov

3 Ov

4 +5V

5 +5V

6 + 5V

7 SG

6 THSA1

9 THSB1

10 24V

CN3

Ill Ccl

121CA11

131CA21

14 Pcsl

15 * F’csl

16 PAS1

17 * PAS1

18 PBS1

19 * PBS1

20 FG

II

MR-

2UF01(G)

3

C320

PG

10120-3000V

10220 -52A2JL CN32 I n

9

10

10226 -52A2JL

1 GND

2 GND

3 GND

4 +5 VEX

5 +5 VEX

6 +5 VEX

7

8

11

12

13

14 PC3

15 *PC3

EEl

L

19 *PB3

20 FG

CN35

IF-

101263OOOVE dR.

i3FOl(G) a[

[

CN1

CIMR-VM3

(2ND SPINDLE

1 Ov

2 Ov

3 Ov

4 +5V

5 +5V

6 +5V

7 SG

10 24V

CN2 ❑

8 THSA2

9 THSB2

11 CC2

12 CA12

13 CA22

14 PCS2

15 * PCS2

16 PAS2

17 * PAS2

16 PBS2

19 * PBS2

20 FG

CN3

C34-1

10220-52A2J L

1 GND

2 GND

3 GND

4 +5 VEX

5 +5 VEX

6 + 5VEX

:

9

10

11

12

:: PC4

15 * PC4

16 PA4

17 * PA4

16 P B4

19 * PB4

20 FG

~

CN34

10120-3000V

‘n

Ms310t3=

~s3108B~

MR-

D

C340

20F01(G)

‘1

PG

E

SPINDLE

MOTOR r~

SPINDLE

PULSE

GENERATOR

I

I

I n

SPINDLE PULSE

GENERATOR n

IL

1P u

1

— —

32

(c) For machining centers

CNC

UNIT

— .

7

8

9

10

1022O-52A2JL

1 GND

2 GND

JAN CD-SR50-2

11

?,

—

17 *PA4

18 PB4

19 *p134

20 FG

I

I

10126-3OOOVE

,

ix

[

CNI

CIMR-VM3

(SPINDLE)

CN2 CN3

1 Ov

.2

Ov

11 ccl

12 CA1l

3 Ov

4 +5V

5 +5V

6 +5V

7 SG

13 CA21

14

Pcsl

15 * Pcsl

16 PAS1

17 * PAS1 s THSA1 1s PBS1

9 THSB1 19 * PBS1

10 24v 20 FG

CN34 b

—

I 10120-3000V

B-

C34-1

Fig. 12.6

Ms3108=

101

C340

G

SPINDLE PULSE

GENERATOR

(3) Main Cercuit

200/220VAC, 50/60Hz k

, ( ) cl MR-vM3-i:; :;K

(1ST SPINDLE) ( )

Y

Fig. 12.7 Connection to Main Circuit

COOLING FAN

MOTOR

33

34

12.2

DETAILS OF CONNECTION

(1) For Motor with Built-in PG

(a) For lathe

CNC

UNIT

—.

-—

J==l

CN33-22

CN3321

CN3?L8

c“”

3T

CN32-16

CN32-17

CN32-18

CN 32-19

CN 32-14

CN 32-15

CN 3220

C)A3 .-..,

GND(DA) ~ ~

*ALM3

‘Y

SPINDLE DRIVE UNIT

L CIMR-VM3-HLI

CNI-3

CN 1-4

E@

I

CN2-16 PA3

*PA3

C-..,

\ \ P

CN2-17

PB3

* PB3

CN2-18

\ j P CN2-19

PC3 I I CN2-14

*PC3 I i !

P CN2.15

FG3

:. /’

(1STSPINDLE)

%%

I

Fig. 12.8 Connection to Motor with Built-in PG (1st Spindle)

(b) For multi-axis lathe

CNC UNIT

—-

‘1

JANCD - SR50 -3

I

CN32-16

CN33-21

Ct433-8

CN33-9

B&

DA3~

*ALM3

I

I

JPA3

,-..>

GND(DA) ~ ]

CN33-27

=11

P:

CN1-3

CN1-4

7

:N2-16

CIMR-VM3-i’Xj

(1STSPINDLE)

CN3-16

CN32-17 ~kPA3

:N2-17

CN3-17 =Ed=

CN3-18 PB Ii PB 3 :N2-18

CN32-19 ~iP03

INDLE DRIVE UNIT

:N2-I 9

CN3-19 z

*PB1,

Pcl~ CN32-14 Pc 3

:N2-14 CN3-14

*PC3

CN32-20

-–––t–

FG

-J

:N2-I 5

CN3-”5 ZsIH!i=

CN3-4 +5V ;

CN3-1

] w !

P:

CN3-5

CN3-2

+5V I

Ov ;

~

P!

{

PI

:

CN3-6 +5V f ;

JANCD-SR50

CN35-22

CN35-21

CN35-8

CN35-9

=+:

CN34-16

CN34-17

CN32-19

CN34-14

CN34-15

CN 34-20

=/=

PC4

*PC4

FG

*

* PA4

*ALM3

I

I

I

PA4

I

~

GND(DA)

—6ND($A11

i

CN3-3 Ov : P!

3 cN3-8 l“ThtsAIl i

,-.,

=

\ clMR-vrd3-nil

CN1-3

CN1-4

F

(2NDSPINDLE)

I

H

CN3-’

CN3-7

SPINDLE DRIVE UNIT

●

Ezlt=

SS “~’

I

I

I

CN3-16 PA 2 :“”-’\

CN3-17 *PA 2[ Pi

PB 4

CN3-18 PB 2: ~

CN3-”

CN3-14

CN3-15 zEzIEjn~

Pc 2:

*PC 2: P’

=;

+5V : ;

,

CN3-4

Ov ~ P!

CN3-1

CN3-5

CN3-2

+5V :

Ov ; P\

;

r

.

3

5 i--

~i-i---

—

3

1

2

9

[

.10

&El

.

PG

P(3

Fig. 12.9 Connection to Motor with Built-in

PG (1st Spindle, 2nd Spindle)

I

35

(c) For machining centers

CNC

UNIT

.— -—

JANCD-SR50-2

SPINDLE DRIVE UNIT

CIMR-VM 3-Cii.i.

(SPINDLEI

I

AC SPINDL

MOTOR

U/%SKA-[

Fig. 12.10

Connection to Motor with Built-in

CN34-16

CN34-17

CN34-lS

CN32-19

CN34-14

CN34-15

CN34-20

I

PA4

*PA4

PB4

*PB4

PC4

*PC4

FG

,

{ ;

;

:“-’.,

; !

P

[ ~

; ~ P

“- ;

1P

CN2-16

CN2-17

CN2-16

CN2-19

CN2-14

=&&k

CN3-19

CN3-14

CN3-15

CN3-4

CN3-1

CN3-5

CN3-2

CN3-6

+--L--=’

Pcl{ :

*PCl~ xi

+5V :

P’

Ov \ P!

+5V :

Ov \ P!

+5V :

;

;

; r

1

2

9

.

Pr3

CN3-8

I

CN3-3

43L

Ov : P!

TMSAIi

,m,

:

11 TS

12

I

I

PG (Spindle)

(2) For Motor with Separately Installed PG

(a) For lathe

—-_

CNC UNIT

_

I

I

I

JANCD SR50- 1

I I

I

I

CN32-16

CN32-17

CN32-18

CN32-19

CN32-14

CN32-15

PA3

* PA3

PB3

* PB3

PC3

*PC3

,.-

, ‘,

: P;

:;

I

: P:

\

/

\

\

\

\

)<

/

>>

/

>>

\\

/ ; P!

,

,,

II

!$

,;

1,

1,

,4

1!

,!

1;

,1

CN32-1

CN32-5

CN32-2

CN32-6

CN32-3

CN32-20

—-

<

+5vEX

GND

+5VEX

GND

+5V EX

GND

FG

!j

~ ?;

;; c P;

/;

; PI

‘.

,

E

CN32-4 3

“ ‘ ‘;

— J

CNS-A

CNS-N

CNS-C

CNS-R

CNS-B

CNS-P

SPINDLEPULSEGENERATOR

(1ST SPINDLE)

PA 1

*PA1

PB 1

*PB1

Pc 1

*pcl

Fig.

12.11

Connection to Motor with

Separately Installed PG (1st Spindle)

37

(b) For multi-axis lathe

—

-’

CN32-16

CN32-17

CN32-18

CN32-19

CN32-14

CN32-15

-—

CNC UNIT

j~~

*PC3

CN 32-4

CN 32-1

CN 32-5

CN 2-2

CN32-6

CN 32-3

CN32-20

1,

,, l,,

::

1,

//

/

>:

>>

/

/

+5VEX

Gt4D

+5VEX

GND

+5VEX

GND l;:

‘!.

II t, r,

1,

II

~1

I

I

P!

~~

1:

,

; P:

!

CN34-16

CN34-17

CN%18

CN34-19

CN34-15

=/:

IT;

—

/’

I

-..

t’A 4

*PA4

PB4

* PB4

PC4

*PC4

,:

1

I

,.-

,,

: P;

~i

: P:

;!

; P!

SPINDLE PULSE GENERATOR

(1ST SPINDLE)

=

CNS-B

CNS-P

:;

*PC1

T

7

\\

\

~

4)

A

CNS-H

CNS-K

+5

OV

SPINDLE PULSE GENERATOR

(2ND SPINDLE)

+

\.

/-

\

\

,-

\

\

//

I

I

CNS-A

CNS-N

CNS-C

CNS-R

CNS-B

CNS-P

PA 2

*PA2

PC 2

*pc2

\

1

I

I

38

—_

-. .-!

“

CN34-20

CN%4

CN34-1

CN34-5

CN34-2

CN%6

+5VEX

GND

+5VEX

Gt4D

=/!

1;

/ P;

::

‘ P;

;;

~ Pt

D

“

E

‘;

FG ‘.

/

_

J

Fig. 12.12

Connection to Motor with Separately

Installed PG (1st Spindle, 2nd Spindle)

(c) For machining centers

—._

CNC UNIT

_

JANCD-SRW-2

I

CN34-16

CN34-17

CN34-18

CN34-19

CN34-14

CN34-15

.

PA4

\

/

: *PA4

PB4

; *PB4

\

, PC4

: *PC4

.

CN34-4

CN34-1

CN34-5

CN34-2

CN34-6

CN34-3

CN34-20

_

<

<

.

+5vEX

<

.

.

.

FG

I

/--’!

: P!

f;

: P:

;!

:$P;

,

,,

1

1,

!1

,;

I

!1

1,

II

;1

);

,,

,

—-

._____l

Fig. 12.13

Connection to Motor with Separately

Installed PG (Spindle)

I

SPINDLE PULSE GENERATOR

(1ST SPINDLE)

\

/

\

\

/

\

/

\

\

I

CNS-A

CNS-N

CNS-C

CNS-R

CNS-B

CNS-P

PA 1

*PA1

PB 1

*PB1

Pc 1

*pcl

(PG)

1’

12.3 CABLE SPECIFICATIONS

Inverter Mod

Rated

CIMR-VM:: c&

,

23P7

25P5

27P5

22

33

45

66

200V

2011

2015

2018

90

400V

2022

2030

43P7

45P5

47P5

4011

4015

4018

4022

4030

Terminal Name

33

45

55

66

90

111

132

180

11

16

22 y;:?

3.5

5.5

8.0

14.0

30.0

38.0

50.0

2.0

2.0

3.5

5.5

8.0

14.0

14.0

30.0

Table 12.1 Main Circuit Cable

Size (mm2 ) ‘“te

600V Class

Fke-registant

Crosslinked

Polyethylene Cable

2.0

3.5

5.5

14.0

22.0

.22.0

3.5

5.5

8.0

14.0

22.0

30.0

50.0

2.0

2.0

2.0

600V Class

Rubbet’-insulated

Cabtyre 400V Cable

3.5

5.5

8.0

14.0

22.0

28.0

50.0

2.0

2.0

3.5

5.5

8.0

14.0

22.0

30.0

Terminal Name and Screw Size

Inverter Terminal

Input

M8

M8

M8

M8

M8

M5

M5

M5

M5

MS

M5

M8

M8

M8

M8

M8

R, s,

T, E

Motor

Terminal

M8

M8

M8

M4

M5

M5

M8

M8

M8

M8

M8 u, v,

W, E

M8

M8

M4

M5

M5 output

M5

M5

M5

M8

M8

M8

M8

M8

M8

M8

M8 u, v,

W, E

M8

M8

M5

M5

M5

Note: Cable size isselected atambient temperature30~ when built with 3-core l-thread in the air.

The maxium allowable temperature of the conductor is 60~ for IV, VV and CT cables, and 110”C for 600V fire-resistant crosslinked polyethylene cables.

Precautions on Cable Selection at High Ambient Temperature —>

When ambient temperature exceeds 30C, thecable allowable cument is reduced.

Select thecable size in accordance with the technical materials of the cable manufacturer based on rated current.

Inverter

200V

400V

Cable

Table 12.2 Cooling Fan Motor Cable

Terminal Name and Screw Size

Control Power

Input

Inverter Terminal

Cooling Fan output

Motor Terminal

600V Class polyvinyl insulated wire,

Size 2mmZ

M4 M4 M4

13.

CONNECTION TO TAPE

13.1

CONNECTION TO EACH UNIT

CNC UNIT

1

JAN CD-CP50

10220.52A2J L

1 SG1

2 DR1

3 ER1

4 Csl

5 RS1

6 RD1

7 SD1

8

9

10 FG

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20 FG

CN20

II

C20

1012O-3OOOVE

DB-25P

TAPE READER UNI1

PTR

T

200/220VAC,

50/60Hz

Fig. 13.l

Connection to Each Unit

13.2 DETAILS OF CONNECTION

JANCDcPW

----------

I AYt HtAUtK

,,.,,-

UNI I

TAPE READER

MODEL 2801 E

,,

... ...

CN20-7 ,

CN20-6 x m

CN20- 3

CN20- 2

CN20- 1

*

SD

RD

34128 m

—

POWER SUPPLY

200/220VAC,

50/60Hz

J-

—

TRANSFORMER

;::~:ov 4

1

2

E

Note : Wire length between tape reader and main board should be 3 m max.

For using the cable exceeding 3 m, contact your YASKAWA representative.

Fig. 13.2 Connection to Tape Reader

TAPE HANDLER

MODEL 1402

MODEL 1500

14. CONNECTION TO RS-232C INTERFACE

14.1 CONNECTION TO EACH UNIT

CNC UNIT

JAN CD-CP50

10220-52A2J L

1 SG1

2 DR1

3 ER1

4 Csl

5 RS1

6 RD1

7 SD1

6 DINO

9 024DI

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

;; FG

CN20

C20

Fig. 14.1 Connection to Each Unit

14.2 DETAILS OF CONNECTION

DB25S

RS-232C

INTERFACE

CNC UNIT

-. ——. —.—. -.— .-.

—.

I

,

JANCD-CP59

I TO12f-3W0VE

INTERFACE

CONNECTOR

DB-25s

—

>,

(;

>,

,,

>

>j :

>’

:;

CN-2

CN-3

CN-4

CN-5

CN-20

CN-6

CN-7

+“;

TO

OUTSIDE OF NC

Fig. 14.2 Connection to RS-232C

42

14.3 RS-232C INTERFACE

(1) Transmission Mode

Start-stop synchronization: Each data bit is preceded by a start signal, and followed by a stop signal.

OFF

A SINGLE START-STOP CHARACTER r

+

START

BIT

DO DI D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

DATA BIT STOP BIT

(1 OR 2 BITS)

Function

Signal Condition

Logic

Table 14.1

Vo< -3V

OFF

Mark

1

00> +3V

ON

Space

0

(2) Codes Used

The following two types of codes areused, and are selectively used by parameters (#6026D5, #6028D5).

. EIA codes or ISO codes

. EIA codes or 1S0 codes + control codes (DC 1- DC4)

To use control codes, the machine to be controlled must be able to discriminate codes DC1 through DC4.

Codes DC1 -

DC4 are as follows.

Table 14.2

Character

Dc ~ Tape reader start

‘C2

Tape reader punching

Tape reader

DC3 stop

DC4

Tape punch release o

8 7 6 5 o o o o

4 :;; 3 2

0

0 0

0

1

0

(3) Transmission Baud Rate

Transmission baud rates can be selected at any rate between 50 and 9600 bauds with parameters.

Refer to (7) in Par. 14.2.

(4) Cable Length

The permissible maximum cable length varies with the machine to be controlled.

Refer to the machine builder’s manual.

(Standard maximum cable length is 15 m.)

(5) Interconnection

Symbol

Table 14.3

RS-232C interface Connecting Cable(A)

NC (DB-25P)

Signal Name

RD

RS

Cs

DR

SG

ER

FG / Frame grounding

SD Sending data

Receiving data

Sending data

Capable of sending

Data set ready

Signal grounding

I

Data terminal ready

Connections

Pin

No.

/ 1 10—o

2

3

4 0

External

Equipment

Symbol

I FG

SD

RD

RS

5

6

G

\-o

Cs

DR

7 0

Ii

20

\

SG

IO BUSY

NC outputs control codes DC 1- DC4 to start and stop the machine, but the machine can not output control codes to control the NC.

However, when the machine under control is unable to process data in time, it can control the CS signals of the NC to halt the data outputting of the NC.

When CS signals of the NC are not used, short CS and RS as shown Table 14.4.

Symbol

Table 14.4

RS-232C Interface Connecting Cable (B)

NC (DB-25P)

External

Equipment

Connections

Signal Name

Symbol

DR

SG

ER

FG I Frame grounding

SD

RD

I Sending data

Receiving data

RS

Cs

Sending data

Capable of sending

Data set ready

Signal grounding

Data terminal ready

~Description of signals

FG: Safety grounding

SD : Transmission data (output)

RD : Received data (input)

111 0—------

/21~/+SD

3 (3’”W

4

5

6

7 0

20

A-) j FG

RD

RS

Cs

DR

SG

0

0

bl

ER (OR

IO ARARM)

‘1!’

START

I I

I

1,,

~STOP

RS: Request for sending (output) – When sending data, NC is turned ON when starting transmission, and turned OFF when transmission ends.

CS: For sending (input) –When this input signal is ON, NC can send data.

If the machine under control is unable to process data in time, it can turn OFF this signal to interrupt the transmission of data from NC within2 characters.

When this signal isnotused, connect lines asshown in Table 14.4.

SG: Signal grounding.

ER: Data terminal ready – Use this signal as a tape rewinding signal if a tape reader is connected to an RS-232C interface.

The tape reader can be rewound if this signal is ON.

NOTE

Among the RS-232C interface signals, the following are normally not used by the NC.

DR: Data set ready

ER: Data terminal ready

CD: Data receiving carrier detection

However, when “ 1” is set for parameter CHKDR (#6021 D4), a

DR (data set ready) interlock is added.

(6) Signal Exchange Timing

. When NC receives data.

Data can be received in the following sequence and timing.

(a) NC sends code DC1.

(b) At code DC1, the machine under control starts to send data to

NC.

(c) If the NC can not process data in time, it sends out code DC3.

(d) At code DC3, the machine stops sending data within 10 characters.

(e) NC again sends code DC1 after processing data.

(f) At code DC1, the machine sends out the data that succeeds the previously sent one.

(g) Upon reading in the data, NC sends out code DC3.

(h) The machine stops sending data.

(a) NC sends out code DC2, and subsequently sends out data.

(b) If the machine under control can not process the data in time,

NC stops CS at no IO BUSY signal.

(c) Upon completion of the data processing by the machine, NC turns on CS. NC sends out data that succeeds the previous one.

(d) Upon completion of data sending, NC sends out code DC4.

;?tTPUT

~–

SD

OUTPUT ~

Cs

INPUT

DC2 DC4

L

Fig.

14.4

NOTE

D.C1 and DC3 code from RD is not available when NC sends out data.

(7) Parameter Setting

When using RS-232C, set data transmission baud rates, stop bit lengths, and control code sending specifications with the parameters shown in Table 14.6.

(a) RS-232C interface port selection

Select the RS-232C interface port by setting #6003.

Table 14.5 RS-232C Interface Port Selection

Interface

RS-232C port 1

Input

#6003Do output

#6003D4

Note: The above bit is selected at parameter setting” 1”

(b) RS-232C interface port 1

Baud rate setting of RS-232C interface port 1 is shown in Table

14.6.

Table 14.6 Baud Rate Setting

~RTPUT

DC1 DC3 DC1 7 DC3

RD

INPUT

J

1=”

, ., ,.

~

10 CHARACTERS MAX

Cs

INPUT

Fig. 14.3

* @ represents “rewide stop code”, which is the same as “%” of ISO.

When NC sends out data

NC sends out data in the following sequence and timing.

~ z

>

2

~

2

~ m

110

150

200

300

600

1200

2400

4800

9600

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

1

0

0

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

1 o

1

0

0

1

0

1

44

14.3 RS-232C INTERFACE (Cent’d)

“ Stop bit length setting

# 6026 D4 for input 1: Sets stop bit at two bits.

# 6028 D4 for output O: Sets stop bit at one bit.

. Setting of control code sending

# 6026 D5 for input 1: Does not send control code.

# 6028 D5 for output O: Sends control code.

15. DIRECT-IN SIGNAL CONNECTION

15.1 CONNECTION TO EACH UNIT

SKIP m

A—?—6

—-

CNC UNIT

=

Oz. DI

CNIO-11, 12.13

CN1O-1.2,3,9 k

~

DINo

/DINo cN10-18

CN1O-8

F

CNC UNIT

JAN CD-CP50

1022O-52A2JL

.~

Fig. 15.1

‘1

CN1O

!

1

Ii

1012O.3OOOVE

Clo

lb

15.2 DETAILS OF CONNECTION

The following input signals require high-speed processing and are connected to the PC board (type JANCD-PC50), instead of generalpurpose 1/0 boards.

These signals are processed directly by the NC main processing unit without coursing through the PC.

DINO: Skip input

Direct-in signal connection is shown in Fig, 15.1 and 15.2,

DIRECT

IN

Fig. 15.2

Direct-in Signal

Connection Using

OV Common

SKIP

-—&—

4

/DIN O

DIN O

FG

L

CN1O-2O

—.

—-

I

I---

CNC UNIT

TYPE JANCD-PC50

—_ —__

__

—

+24 VDI

CN1O-I1, 12,13

CN1O-I,2,3,9

CN1O-I8

CN1O-8

-%

:N1o-2o

Fig.

15.3

Direct-in Signal

Connection Using

24V Common

—-

45

15.3 DETAILS OF SIGNALS

_ TIME

SIGNAL

RECEIVED BY

NC

40@ 40#s

Fig. 15.4 Time Chart

JANCD-PC50

~

JANCD-PC50

J<

+ 24V

/-)

APPROX

8mA

I

CN1O-1-3,9 I

(a) OV Common

(b) 24V Common

Fig. 15.5

110 Circuit

16.

CONNECTiON TO GENERAL-PURPOSE 1/0 SIGNALS

16.1

CONNECTION TO EACH UNIT

CNC UNIT

-[

MRP-8F0’

1/0 MODULE

CNII

JAN CDFC81O

FC880

FC861

MR-8RMD2

CPS (POWER SUPPLY)

172040.1

—

I m

—— —

DETAILS OF CONNECTION

CNC UNIT

CN13-3

..

B“

CN13-4

JAN CD-PC50

I

~I SH

)1 i

I

1

I

CN02

D

172060-1

%izm+l[

CN13

172037-1

CN7

P

I

Fig. 16.1

CN1l-1

CN1l-2

CN1l-3

1/0 MOD~ll F

CN13-1

CN13-4

CN13-3

CN13-5

JANc D- Fc810/Fc860/Fc881

I

Fig.

16.2

GonneGticm tvGeneral-purpoae l(O~ignal

CN7

CN7

16.3 CONNECTION TO

ADDITIONAL GENERAL-PURPOSE 1/0 SIGNALS

CNC UNIT

JANCD-PC50

MR-8RMA4

CN13

MRP-8FOI

CN13

P

[

1/0 MODULE NO 1

JANCD-FC81O

/FC860/FC861

;Nll CN12

MR-8RMD2

HI

C130

1/0

MODULE NO.2

JANCD-FC81O

/FC860/F:8&12

;Nll

MR-8RMD2

H[

C130

1/0 MODULE NO.3

JANCD.

FC81O

/Fc860/Fc861

;Nll

MR-8RMD2

C200

BE @2040.;N”

CN7

&o---

C200

H[

;N13

-O-*

CN7

16.4

DETAILS OF CONNECTION

1/0 MODULE NO. I

JAN CD- F~81 O/FC860/FC861

,.-----

1/0 MODULE NO.2

JANcD-Fc810/Fc860/Fc861

CN7 0,4V CN7 OXV

—

Fig. 16.4 Connection to Additional General-purpose 1/0 Signal

I

Notes:

1. Up to 3 general-purpose 1/0 modules can be connected (when FC8 10 or F860 is used.)

2. It is necessary to terminate the final module since another general-pm-pose I/O module can be added.

<Example>

CNC UNIT

‘7

1/0 MODULE

1/0 MODULE

I

“W”r

+13 +q.

NO. I SETTING

TERMINATION

ON/OFF

(sw3) lo~J3

NO.2

SETTING

~EM::ATION (SW 3)

(Forterminal1/0 module)

3. Logic can be set to “ 1” by short-pin SW2 setting of an 1/0 module (FC8 10, FC860, FC861) when the input contact is “closed” disregarding whether common OV or 24V is used.

INVERS (SW 2)

ON/OFF ON/OFF

-10

(ON)

0 ~]

(OFF)

4. 1/0 port 1/0 addresses of an 1/0 module can be set by rotary switch (SW1 ).

.

Positions of TERMINATION, INVERS, and ADDRESS switches

1/0 MODULE (JANCD-FC810, FC860)

1

1

1/0 MODULE (JANCD-FC861 )

❑

•“~ ml f

F@

❑

‘w’

%SRDDRESS

TERMINATION

Q,cn

-

1/0 MOOULE (JANCD-SP50) o z o

o

wl

Swl

~ADDRESS

;

0 ;

.

mm

kLJ2__dcN7

mm

EillzElg

r

1 1

‘EBB

I I

49

17.

CONNECTION TO GENERAL-PURPOSE 1/0

17.1

CONNECTION TO EACH UNIT

1/0 MODULE

‘~

CN2

MR-20RMD2

CN3

MR-50RMD2

CN4

MR-50RMD2

P’

~n lo!

C52

MRP-20F01

i

C53

MRP-50F01

C54

MRP-50F01

0 c!

FOR UNIT SIGNALS

D

1/0 MOOULE

‘~

‘z:

ik

:$:i=

CN5 C65

FRC2-AA50-20S FRC2-C50S12-OL

CN6

FRC2-C50S12-OL

C66

FRC2-AA50-20S D n

FOR UNIT SIGNALS

1/0 MODULE

-~

(Use ths cablewhenexternal IS 1

--

CN2

FRC2-C50S12-OL

C72

FRC2-AA50-20S

Pn !

-ux!E!Ji

~

I

UOMOOULE

FOR UNIT SIGNALS

FOR OPERATOR’S

PANEL

SIGNAL

17.2 DETAILS OF CONNECTION

17.2.1 FC81O/FC860 MODULE

Lr===l

Ov +24V

--l

‘~

’33)

,

TYPES JANCD-FC81 O, FC860

CONNECTOR r iN4

I

PIN NO

> >

(19)

1

(35)

(5)

I

> >

(21)

>>

(36)

> >

(6)

>)

(22)

> >

(7)

(23)

(38)

~

‘ ‘h

,

I o.4

Notes :

1. This connection example shows +24 V common.

O V common is also available.

Refer to Par. 18.3.2.1 1/0 Module Types

JANCD-FC8 10/FC860 for connection details.

2. The addresses are those for module No. 1. The address layouts for modules Nos. 2 and 3 are the same as shown above starting with newer addresses.

Refer to Appendix B (3), Address Classification for details.

Fig. 17.2 Connection to Address and Bit Nos.

#1 000.0 to#1001.7

on FC81 O/FC860 Modules

1

1 t

1

J

1

J

1

ADDRESS

NO.

#looo.

BIT

NO o

#looo.

1

#looo.

2

?$1000.

3

#looo.

4

#looo.

5

#1000.

6

#looo.

7

#lool.

o

#lool.

1

#lool.

#lool.

#lool.

2

3

4

#lool.

5

#1001.

6

#lool.

7

52

1-

I_===l

COtiNECTOR CN4 -

O, FC860

+2

( v

--l

1

TYPES JANCD-FC81 r

I

PIN NO,

/

(39) d I

I

> >

(9)

> ‘ (25)

> >

(40)

(lo)

> >

(26)

‘ (41)

2 >

2 >

(11)

> (27)

>

(42)

‘ (12)

> >

> >

(43)

>>

(13)

> >

(44) r

+ it

4

L

/------+

Coh’131

J :::.) o

2.

~.

Notes :

1. This connection example shows +24 V common.

O V common is also available.

Refer to Par. 18.3.2.1, 1/0 Module Types

JANCD-FC810/FC860 for connection details.

2. The addresses are those for module No. 1. (#1002.O to #1003.7).

The address layouts for modules Nos. 2 and 3 are the same as shown above starting with newer addresses.

Classification for details.

Refer to Appendix B (3), Address

Fig. 17.3 Connection to Address and Bit Nos.

#1002.0 to #1 003.7 on FC81 O/FC860 Modules

.—

I

1

1

I t

1

1

1

I

\

I

1

J

ADDRESS

NO.

#loo2

BIT

NO o

*1 OO2.

1

#loo2.

#loo2

2

3

#loo2 4

#loo2.

5

#1002 6

#loo2.

7

#loo3.

o

#loo3 1

#loo3 2

#loo3 3

#loo3.

4

#loo3 5

#1003 6

#loo3, 7

+24V

_.--/,

TYPES JANCD-FC81

—.

CONNECTORCN4

O, FC860

PIN NO

(15)

(46)

(16)

4

I

ADORESS 81T

NO.

NO

#loo4.

o

I

#loo4.1

#1004.2

#loo45

(48)

_.--.J’.

.

r-----

(1 To 3)

‘+

02.

COM 32

Notes :

1. This connection example shows +24 V common.

O V common is also available.

Refer to Par. 18.3.2.1, 1/0 Module Types

JANCD-FC810/FC860 for connection details.

2. The addresses are those for module No. 1. (#1004.O to #1004.7).

The address layouts for modules Nos. 2 and 3 are the same as shown above starting with newer addresses. Refer to Appendix B (3), Address Classification for details.

Fig. 17.4 Connection to Address and Bit Nos. #1 004.0 to

#1004.7 on FC81 O/FC860 Modules

53

L

Ov

+24V

J

-_----/,

CONNECTORCN5

PIN NO

(23)

(22)

(21)

(20)

(39)

(38)

(7)

(6)

(12)

(11)

(25)

(24)

(lo)

(40)

(9)

(8)

(4)

, jl

+1

+] cord40

4?

o. .

I

1

I

1

1

1

1

.44DRESS

#loo5

BIT

NO.

o

#loo5.

1

#loo5 2

#loo5 3

#loo5 4

#loo5.

5

#1005 6

I t

#loo5 7

#1006.

O

#1006.

1

#1006, 2

#1006 3

#1006.

4

#1006.

5

#1006, 6

#1006.

7 t

Notes :

1. This connection example shows +24 V common.

O V common is also available.

Refer to Par. 18.3.2.1, I/O Module Types

JANCD-FC810/FC860 for connection details.

2. The addresses are those for module No. 1. (#1005.O to #1006.7).

The address layouts for modules Nos. 2 and 3 are the same as shown above starting with newer addresses.

Refer to Appendix B (3), Address

Classification for details.

Fig. 17.5 Connection to Address and Bit Nos. #1005.0 to

#1006.7 on FC81 O/FC860 Modules

_--_.-/,

TYPES JANCD-FC81 O, FC860

CONNECTOR ?N5

PIN NO.

(18)

.

.

(17)

.

.

.

\

.

(14)

.

.

,

.

(13)

(36)

LJ——Ll

—

(35)

(34)

(33)

Iv +

1

1

ADDRESS

NO.

#loo7.

BIT

NO o

#loo7.

1

J

1

#loo7.

4

I

, ,

J

L

I 1

—————

1

I

#loo7.

#1008.

#1008.

1

#1008.

I

#1008.

[

7

O

1

2

3

~

(26)

41

)

~

—

?:~o

COM41 o 2.

1

1

#1003 6

#1008 7

Notes :

1. This connection example shows +24 V common.

OVcommon is also available.

Refer to Par. 18.3.2.1, I/O Module Types

JANCD-FC810/FC860 for connection details.

2. Theaddresses arethose formodule No.l. (#1007 .Oto #1008.7).

The address layouts formodules Nos. 2and3 arethesame asshown above starting with newer addresses. Refer to Appendix B (3), Address Classification for details.

Fig. 17.6 Connection to Address and Bit Nos. #1007.Oto

#1008.7 on FC81 O/FC860 Modules

56

POWER

r-

SUPPLY

+-

v

-J

TVPF<

!,, L., .

..

lAN~n.FrFtlf?

UWUW .

--,

—-

CONNECTOR CN5

-,,---”

FCRW r

/

.

PIN NO.

(49)

/

.

(48)

/

.

[47)

./

(46)

./

(45)

/

.

(44)

./

(43)

(42)

.

/

[29)

(1 ‘rO 3)

,

I

)

,

,

,

COM 42

ADDRESS

NO

RI;

#loo9.

o

}

#loo9.

1

#loo9.

2

#loo9 3

#loo9.

4

#loo9.

5

#1009 6

#loo9.

7

Notes :

1. This connection example shows +24 V common.

O V common is also available.

Refer to Par. 18.3.2.1, 1/0 Module Types

JANCD-FC810/FC860 for connection details.

2. The addresses are those for module No. 1. (#1009.O to #1009.7).

The address layouts for modules Nos. 2 and 4 are the same as shown above starting with newer addresses.

Refer to Appendix B (3), Address Classification for details.

Fig. 17.7 Connection to Address and Bit Nos.

#1009.0 to #1009.7 on FC81 O/FC860 Modules

F

I

Ov

L

+ v

L->

J

TYPES JANCD-FC81

CONNECTOR CN3

O, FC860

/

.

PIN NO

(39)

(9)

(25)

(40)

.

(lo)

/

.

(26)

(41)

T

.

.

(11)

/

.

.

(12)

>>

(43)

> >

(13)

> >

(44)

> >

(14)

>

(45)

1~ +

4] r

I

1

I

I

1

COM20

:~,

0 .,

I

I

1

/44DRESS

#lolo

BIT

NO.

o

#lolo.

1

#lolo 2

#lolo.

3

#lolo.

4

#lolo.

5

#1010.

6

#lolo.

7

1

#loll 2

#loll.

3

#loll

#loll.

#1011 6

4

5

#loll, 7

Notes :

1. This connection example shows +24 V common.

OV common is also available.

Refer to Par. 18.3.2 .1,1/O Module Types

JANCD-FC8 10/FC860 for connection details.

2. Theaddresses wethose formodule No.l. (#lOIO.O to#lOll.7).

The address layouts for modules Nos. 2 and 3 are the same as shown above starting with newer addresses.

Refer to Appendix B (3), Address Classification for details.

Fig, 17.8 Connection to Address and Bit Nos.

#1010.O to #101 1.7 on FC810/FC860 Modules

r--

TYPES JANCD-FC81O, FC860 coNNEcioRcN3

>5

(46) ~ #lo12.

1

#lo12 2

#lo12.

3

#lo12 4

#lo12 5

#1012 6

#lo12.

7

I

r--‘(29)

.l(l T04)

Notes :

1. This connection example shows +24 V common.

O V common is also available.

Refer to Par. 18.3.2.1, 1/0 Module Types

JANCD-FC8 10/FC860 for connection details.

2. Theaddresses arethose formodule No.l. (#1012.0 to#lOl2.7).

The address layouts formodules Nos. 2and3are thesame asshown above starting with newer addresses.

Refer to Appendix B (3), Address Classification for details.

Fig. 17.9 Connection to Address and Bit Nos.

#1012,0 to #1012.7 on FC810/FC860 Modules

m

L +24V

-J

I

TYPES JANCD-FC81

CONNECTOR CN2

O. FC860

/

/

.

PIN NO.

(1)

;

(14)

/

.

(2)

,

(8)

/

(15)

,

.

(3)

,

(9)

(16)

T

L

r .

.

(18)

—

,

,

)

I

-II

r

COM 10

02.

fi:DRESS

#lo13.

BIT

NO.

o

}

#lo13.

1

1

#lo13.

2

1

}

$$1013.

3

I t

#lo13.

4

#lo13.

5

#1013 6

#lo13 7

1

1. This connection example shows +24 V common.

O V common is also available.

Refer to Par. 18.3.2.1, 1/0 Module Types

JANCD-FC8 10/FC860 for connection details.

2. The addresses are those for module No. 1. (#1013.O to #1013.7).

The address layouts for modules Nos. 2 and 3 are the same as shown above starting with newer addresses.

Refer to Appendix B (3), Address Classification for details.

Fig. 17.10

Connection to Address and Bit Nos.

#1013.O to #1013.7 on FC810/FC860 Modules

-.,,--- ,. .,-- ----. . . . .

I Y Yt>

—-

J,41NLU-FL!3

I U, KXbU

.—— -

CONNECTOR

-—

CN1

PIN NO

(28)

—-

=

#l loo.

1

#l loo.

2

#l loo.

3

#l loo4

#lloo.5

#1100.

6 ttl loo. 7

#llol.

o

#llol.1

#llol.2

#no l-3

#llol.4

#1101.5

#1101.6

#llol.7

+

0,4

-i

1

I

+

I

*I r“

I

,—_--+

-1 t

(26)

(27)

(41)

(8)

(7)

(6)

(5)

(29)

T

(2.4)

\

,

(23)

(22)

(21)

(20)

(lo)

(9)

(1 TO 4)

(19) a

Note :

The addresses are those for module No. 1. (#1 100.0 to #1 101.7).

address layouts formodules Nos. 2and3 are the same as shown above starting with newer addresses.

Refer to Appendix B (3), Address

Classification for details.

Fig. 17.11

Connection to Address and Bit Nos.

#1 100.0 to#1101.7

on FC810/FC860 Modules

+24V Ov

TYPES JANCD-FC81 O, FC860

—-

PIN NO, i

I

‘30)< K------

I u

I

inn,?.

rcm c1 ,m”l “ I v

-1

ADDRESS

NO,

BIT

NO.

#llo2.

o

#llo2.

1

#llo2.2

#llo2.3

#1102.4

#llo2.5

#1102.6

#1102.7

#llo3.

o

#llo3.

#llo3.2

#llo3.3

#llo3.4

#llo3.5

#1103.6

#llo3.7

1

I

I

I

I

I

~_

I

1

1

●

I

A

-1 T

‘40)< ~

1

‘39)< ~

‘38)< ~

‘37)< ~

’36) ~

‘35)<~

‘34)<~

::;< ~

t

“8)< ~

r

I r

1

I t

+

1

1

‘17)< ~

‘16)4——+=—%

“’);~

(14)

)’

/

(13)

/

1’

‘12’<‘~

‘1’)< ~

4

0.4

.---J

I

Note :

The addresses are those for module No. 1. (#1 102.0 to #1 103.7).

The address layouts for modules Nos. 2 and 3 are the same as shown above starting with newer addresses.

Refer to Appendix B (3), Address

Classification for details.

Fig. 17.12

Connection to Address and Bit Nos.

#1 102.0 to#1103.7

on FC81 O/FC860 Modules

ADDRESS

#llo4.

BIT

NO.

o

#llo4.

#1104.2

1

#llo4.3

#1104.4

#llo4.5

#1104.6

81104.7

[

I

-—

CONNECTORCN1

PIN NO.

(32)1<

T

~ ~ r

1

<

, P

‘48)< ‘~

‘47)< ~

‘4’)< ‘=——=—0—

(45)

I

I

I

I t

(43)

I

1

I

0,4

O (1 TO

4)

“’){~

I

I

I nnl. ,rm 1.

lmnl ,, r!

a“...

,

I

I

L

]

Note :

The addresses are those for module No. 1. (#1 104.0 to #1 104.7).

The address layouts for modules Nos. 2 and 3 are the same as shown above starting with newer addresses.

Refer to Appendix B (3), Address

Classification for details.

Fig. 17.13

Connection to Address and Bit Nos.

#1 104.0 to #1 104.7 on FC81 O/FC860 Modules

fi~DRESS BIT

NO.

#llo5.

o

#llo5.

1

#loo 52

#no 5.3

#no 5.1

#no 5.5

#no 5-6

#no 5.7

{ t

~_—

I r

I r

-1

+< (20)

I

“)~ ~

,

,

4

4t

“0)< ~

‘17)< ~

(5)

‘6’< ~

“2< ~

(7)

Ov rl

J

“8)~

Note :

Theaddresses arethose formodule No.l.

(#l105.0

to#llO5.7).

The address layouts formodules Nos. 2 and3 are the same as shown above starting with newer addresses.

Refer to Appendix B (3), Address

Classification for details.

Fig. 17.14

Connection to Address and Bit Nos.

#1 105.0 to#1105.7

on FC81 O/FC860 Modules

TYPES JAN CD-FC8 10, FC860 r

CON NECT6=]

,

I

~

I

+24V Ov

I

I

‘1‘04) ~

Note :

The addresses are those for module No. 1. (#1 106.0 to #1 107.7).

address layouts for modules Nos. 2 and 3 are the same as shown above starting with newer addresses.

Refer to Appendix B (3), Address

Classification for details.

Fig. 17.15

Connection to Address and Bit Nos.

#1 106.0 to#1107.7

on FC81 O/FC860 Modules

TYPES JANCD-FC8T0,

—.

FC860

CONNECTO;~

I

PIN NO. i

#llo9.

o

#llo9.

#llo9.

1 z

#l Io9.

4

#llo9.7

*

I

1

1

,

‘“)< ~

,

‘48){~

““(~

‘4’)&——=—&

{ r

I

—

Note :

The addresses are those for module No. 1. (#1 108.0 to #1 109.7).

The address layouts for modules Nos. 2 and 3 are the same as shown above starting with newer addresses.

Refer to Appendix B (3), Address

Classification for details.

Fig. 17.16

Connection to Address and Bit Nos.

#1 108.0 to#1109.7

on FC81 O/FC860 Modules

“YPES JANCD-FC81O,

—.

FC860

~:DRESS

#lllo.

BIT

NO o

#lllo.1

#lllo.2

#lllo.3

#lllo.4

#lllo.5

#lllo.6

#lllo.7

#lllo.

o

#1111.1

#1111.2

#1111.3

#1111.4

#1111.5

#1111.6

#1111.7

I

I

{

!

I

I

-----

+, r

1

CONNECiOR CN6

1

PIN NO.

(31)

1 t

(26)

(22)

(21)

(20)

(19)

(32)

(25)

(24)

(23)

I

(40) r

J t

(39)

(38)

(37)

(36)

<

(35)

(34)

(33)

-1

---@--l

Note :

The addresses are those for module No.1. (#11 0. Oto#llll.7).

The address layouts formodules Nos. 2and3 arethe same as shown above starting with newer addresses.

Refer to Appendix B (3), Address

Classification for details.

Fig. 17.17

Connection to Address and Bit Nos.

#111 0.0 to#111 1.7 on FC81 O/FC860 Modules

17.2,2 FC 861 MODULE

F==l

L-

+

L.-

-—-/_:

‘~

>

—-

TYPE JANCD-861

.—

!C”NNECT”RCN1

1

PIN NO

MIDRESS BIT

#looo.

NO o

‘1) 1~=

(2) #looo.

I

2 ‘>

(3)

1

#looo.

2

> >

(4)

> >

(5) tilooo.

3

I

#looo.

4

> >

I

(6)

(7)

}

#looo.

5

1

#looo.

6

> >

(8) #looo.

7

#lool.

o

> >

(9)

(10)

>

I

>5

(11)

> >

(12)

—

}

1

#lool.

#lool.

1

2

1

#lool.

3

> >

(13) #loo].

4

> >

(14)

(15)

1

#lool.

5

— #1001.

6

#lool.

7

>(16)

COM 00

J ::4’::046 o

2.

I

—-

Notes :

1. This connection example shows +24 V common.

O V common is also available.

Refer to Par. 18.3.2.2, 1/0 Module Types

JANCD-FC861 for connection details.

2. The addresses are those for module No. 1. (#1000.O to #1001.7).

The address layouts for modules Nos. 2 to 7 are the same as shown above starting with newer addresses.

Refer to Appendix B (3), Address Classification for details.

Fig. 17.18

Connection to Address and Bit Nos.

#1000.0 to #1 001.7 on FC861 Module

F

POWER SUPPLY

( +24V

—

~

~

------+

TYPE JANCD-861

CONNECTOR 6NI

T“-

I

PIN NO

>(’9)

> >

(20)

> >

(21)

—,

Y

2 >

(23)

> (24)

> (25)

;(26) p

’18)

‘43’0 46)

L.

0,.

+1

I

COM 01

_

}

ADDRESS 81T

NO.

NO.

#lo Oz.

o

#loo2.

1

#loo2.

2

I

#lo Oz.

3

}

#loo2.

4

#lo Oz.

5 t

#1002.

1

L

1

#loo2.

6

7

_—

Notes :

1. This connection example shows +24 V common.

OV common is also available.

Refer to par. 18.3.2.2 I/O Module Types

JANCD-FC861 for connection details.

2. Theaddresses arethose formodule No.l. (#1002 .0to#1002.7).

The address layouts formodules Nos. 2t07 arethe same as shown above starting with newer addresses.

Refer to Appendix B (3), Address Classification for details.

Fig. 17.19

Connection to Address and Bit Nos.

#1002.0 to #1 002.7 on FC861 Module

F==l

10”,

L v

J

/

~

TYPE JANCD-861

C0NNEc;ORCN2

PIN NO.

/<

,(1)

1

> >

(2)

(3)

>

,

>>

(4)

>5

(5)

~

—

>

>?

t

(7)

1~ u

14——l.—l

> (9) —

I r l—

>

(10)

1

>

(11) r

>>

(12)

T

— u

+

,

I

1

~

I t 1-

J

}

ADDRESS BIT

NO NO.

#loo3.

o

#loo3.

1

#loo3.

2

#loo3.

3

#loo3.

4

#loo3.

5

#1003.

6

1

————

1

1

I

#loo4.

o

#loo4.

1

#loo4.

2

#loo4.

3

I

(---Y

———J——+

>(43T04’)

I

,

o

.4

c0M02

Notes :

1. This connection example shows +24 V common.

O V common is also available.

Refer to Par. 18.3.2.2, 1/0 Module Types

JANCD-FC861 for connection details.

2. The addresses are those for module No. 1. (#1003.O to #1 104.7). The address layouts for modules Nos. 2 to 7 are tbe same as shown above starting with newer addresses.

Refer to Appendix B (3), Address Classification for details.

Fig. 17.20

Connection to Address and Bit

NOS.

#1003.0 to #1 104.7 on FC861 Module

POWER SUPPLY

r-

+24V

I

---/:

TYPE JANCO-861 rl-)NNFcToFicN2

L r

.

.

.

.

,

.

PIN NO

(19)

.

(20)

(24)

(25)

(26)

(18)

.

(43 TO 46)

—

I

COM 03

[

1

1

7

I

I

#loo5.

o

#loo5.

1

I

1

}

#1005.

5

#1005.

6

1

#loo5.

7

1

Notes :

1. This connection example shows +24 V common.

O V common is also available.

Refer to Par. 18.3.2.2, 1/0 Module Types

JANCD-FC861 for connection details.

2. The addresses are those for module No. 1. (#1005.O to #1 105.7). The address layouts for modules Nos. 2 to 7 are the same as shown above starting with newer addresses.

Refer to Appendix B (3), Address Classification for details.

Fig. 17.21

Connection to Address and Bit Nos.

#1005.0 to #1 005.7 on FC861 Module

H

L-

~

1

CONN;CTORCN3

TYPE JANCD-861 r

I

PIN NO.

7(’)

> (2)

> (13)

2 >

(14)

1 (15)

><

+

----L-+

r~ I ,,.1

>(43T04’)

I

> (3)

> (4)

> ‘ (5)

> >

(6)

> (7)

> s

(8)

2 >

(9)

> >

(lo)

> ‘ (11)

> (12)

L--J o 2.

-

,

+1

Co”o’

I

}

ADDRESS

NO.

#loo6.

#1006.

#1006.

#1006.

#1006.

I

#1006.

#1006.

J

I

#1006.

#loo?.

#loo7.

#loo7.

#loo7.

#loo7.

#loo7.

#loo7

-.

Notes :

1. This connection example shows +24 V common.

O V common is also available.

Refer to Par. 18.3.2.2, 1/0 Module Types

JANCD-FC861 for connection details.

2. The addresses are those for module No. 1. (#1006.O to #1007.7).

The address layouts for modules Nos. 2 to 7 are the same as shown above starting with newer addresses.

Refer to Appendix B (3), Address Classification for details.

Fig. 17.22

Connection to Address and Bit Nos,

#1006.0 to #1 007.7 on FC861 Module

-., -- ,. .,,.- ,.,..

I YYt JAIINLIJ-BO I

—.

1

PIN NO. !

I

.

POWER SUPPLY

Ov

#llol.3

#llol.4

#llol.5

#llol.6

#llol.7

I

1

4

~’

4t

I b

“x){~

‘40)<~

‘4’)< ~

“’){~

rJ=+———

Note :

The addresses are those formodule No.l-l.

(#llOO.Oto

#l101.7).

The address layouts for modules Nos. 2 to 7 are the same as shown above starting with newer addresses.

Refer to Appendix B(3), Address Classification for details.

Fig. 17.23

Connection to Address and Bit Nos.

#1 100.0 to#1101.7

on FC861 Module

TYPE JANCD-861

CONNEC:O=

PIN NO.;

I

(47 ‘< ~

.AADRESS

81T

NO.

#llo2.

o

#llo2.

#no 2.2

#1102.3

1

#1102.4

#1102.5

#11 OZ.6

4

(27 ‘< ~

A

~<~

r

I t

I

‘29)< ~

‘30)<~

‘3’) ~

’32) ~

’33) ~

T

+24V v

-1

#l Io3.

o

‘35)1~

(

#llo3.3

#no?, .4

tillo3.

5 r

1

1 t

-t

I

‘38)1~

‘3’){~

‘40){~

I

4

0.4

‘43 T046)

J

~

Note :

Theaddresses arethose formodule No.l-l.

(#1102 .Oto#l 103.7).

The address layouts formodules Nos. 2t07are thesame asshown above starting with newer addresses.

Refer to Appendix B(3), Ad&ess Classification for details.

Fig. 17.24

Connection to Address and Bit Nos.

#1 102.0 to#1103.7

on FC861 Module

73

r TYPE JANCD-861

CONNECT~R~

PIN NO.

POWER SUPPLY

+24V

Y

Ov

Y

0,4 I

Note :

The addresses arethose formodule No.l-l.

(#1104.O to#l105.7).

The address layouts for modules Nos. 2 to 7 are the same as shown above starting with newer addresses.

Refer to Appendix B(3), Address Classification for details.

Fig. 17.25

Connection to Address and Bit Nos

#1104.0to

#1105.70n

FC861 Module

I

TYPE JANCD-861 r fi:DRESS BIT

NO.

#1106.

O

#1106.

1

#llo6.

2

#1106.

#1106.4

3

#1106.5

#no 6.6

#1106.7

{

[

~-

I

I

I

}

—

1

POWER SUPPLY

+24V

.

Ov

“

(49), ,

(39),/

(40),,

(41)

,

Note :

The addresses are those for module No.1-l.

(#1106.O to#l106.7).

The address layouts for modules Nos. 2 to 7 are the same as shown above starting with newer addresses.

Refer to Appendix B (3), Address Classification for details.

Fig. 17.26

Connection to Address and Bit Nos.

#1 106.0 to#1106.7

on FC861 Module

75

76

17.2.3

SP 50 BOARD

~$$’

CONNECTION

EXAMPLE

I

TYPES JANCD-SP50-1

I CONNECTOR CN4

PIN NO.

, SP50-2

+24V

—

—

+24V

—————’~

> >

(3)

> >

(4)

>>

(5)

> >

(6)

1

(7)

> >

> >

(8)

> >

(9)

> >

1

(lo)

(11)

(12)

> >

(13)

> >

(14)

>>

(15)

—

,

,

+1

>(16)

I— +

7

COM30

,

L -.

Notes :

1. This connection example shows +24 V common.

O V common is also available.

connection details.

Refer to Par.

18.3.2.3, SP50 Board for

2. The addresses are those for module No. 1-1. (#1000.O to #1001 .7). The address layouts for modules Nos. 2 to 8 are the same as shown above starting with newer addresses.

Refer to Appendix B (3), Address Classification for details.

Fig. 17.27

Connection to Address and Bit Nos.

#1000.0 to #1 001.7 on SP50 Board t

}

#looo.

o

#looo.

1

#looo.

2

#looo.

3

#looo.

4

#looo.

5

#1000.

6

#looo.

7

#lool.

o

1

1

#lool.

1

#lool.

#lool.

#loo I.

4

#lool.

5

2

3

#1001.

6

#lool.

7

1

+24V

Y

4

) i~

CONNECTION

EXAMPLE

TYPES JANCD-SP50-I , SP50-2

I CONNECTORC~4

I

I

I

PIN NO.

COM 30

> >

(20)

>

>

> >

(23)

> >

(24)

> L

(25)

,

,

L

’26)

>}(17.18) — ]COM30

(43 TO 46) +-----l

02,

L t

AOORESS

NO.

#lo Oz.

BIT

NO o

#lo Oz.

1

1

#loo2.

2

1

}

#lo Oz.

3

#loo2.

4

1

#loo2.

5

1

#1002.

6

#loo2.

7 t

J

-~

Notes :

1. This connection example shows +24 V common.

O V common is also available.

connection details.

Refer to Par.

18.3.2.3, SP50 Board for

2. Theaddresses aethose formodule No.l-l.

(#1002.0 to#lOO2.7).

The address layouts formodules Nos. 2to 8 are the same as shown above starting with newer addresses.

Refer to Appendix B (3), Address Classification for details.

Fig. 17.28

Connection to Address and Bit Nos.

#1002.0 to #1 002.7 on SP50 Board

I

~

77

~]

~&l;;K~lON

-../_

~

TYPES JANCD-SP50-1

CONNECTGRCN5 r

!

PIN NO.

(47 TO 50)

,24,

I

, SP50-2

-

“)

> >

(2)

> >

1

(3)

(4)

>>

> >

(5)

> >

(6)

>)

,

(7)

> >

(8)

>>

(9)

> >

(lo)

(11)

> >

,

>>

(12)

1

> >

(13)

.—

[ t

1 fDRESS

#loo3.

BIT

NO.

o

#loo3.

1

#loo3.

2

#loo3.

3

#loo3.

4

#loo3.

5

}

I

I

}

#1003.

6

#loo 3.7

#loo4.

o

#loo4.

#loo4.

#loo4.

1

2

3

#loo4.

#loo4.

#1004.

#loo4.

6

7

4

5

+24V

-~

1 cord 30

Notes :

1.

This connection example shows +24 V common.

O V common is also available.

connection details.

Refer to Par.

18.3.2.3, SP50 Board for

2. The addresses are those for module No. 1-1. (#1003.O to #1004.7).

The address layouts for modules Nos. 2 to 8 are the same as shown above starting with newer addresses.

Refer to Appendix B (3), Address Classification for details.

Fig. 17.29

Connection to Address and Bit Nos.

#1003.0 to #1 004.7 on SP50 Board

$)W;MZ;ION v

—————’

I

TYPES JANCD-SP50-1

FIORCN5

, SP50-2

-

PIN NO.

COM 30

>

(20)

;!

(21)

2 >

(22)

>>

(23)

> >

(24)

I

(25)

>>

>(26)

~

—

{

/~

COM 30

F ‘(’’’18)

024

I

.

AODRESS BIT

NO.

NO

#loo5.

o

#loo5.

#loo5.

1

2

1

#loo5.

#loo5.

1

#loo5.

}

#1005.

1

#loo5.

1

3

4

5

6

7

Notes :

1. This connection example shows +24 V common.

O V common is also available.

connection details.

Refer to Par.

18.3.2.3, SP50 Board for

2. The addresses are those for module No. 1-1. (#1005.O to #1005.7).

The address layouts for modules Nos. 2 to 8 are the same as shown above starting with newer addresses.

Refer to Appendix B (3), Address Classification for details.

Fig. 17.30

Connection to Address and Bit Nos.

#1005.O to #1005.7 on SP50 Board

79

—-----~

&I&J~Fd/10N

—----’~

F

TYPES JANCD-SP50-1 mNtiEcT0RcN6 -

, SP50-2

‘ PIN NO.

(47 TO 50)

+24V ii

>(1)

> (2)

,

> >

(3)

> ‘ (4)

,

> (5)

> (6)

> (7)

> L

(8)

> (9)

2 >

(10)

(11)

> >

I

2 >

(12)

>>

(13)

> >

(14)

(15)

>?

,

>(’6)

—

it

COM 30

‘( ’7”8)

-

1

I

}

1

I

1

1

I

1

AODRESS BIT

NO NO.

#1006.

O

#1006.

1

#1006.

2

#1006.

3

#1006.

4

#1006.

5

I

#1006.

6

#1006.

7 t

#loo7.

o

#loo7.

I

#1007.2

#loo 7.3

#loo7.

4

1

I

1

#loo7.

5

#1007.6

#loo 7.7

Notes :

1. This connection example shows +24 V common.

OV common is also available.

connection details.

Refer to Par.

18.3.2.3, SP50 Board for

2. Theaddresses arethose formodule No.l-l.

(#1006.0 to#lOO7.7).

The address layouts for modules Nos. 2to 8 are the same as shown above starting with newer addresses.

Refer to Appendix B (3), Address Classification for details.

Fig. 17.31

Connection to Address and Bit Nos.

#1006.0 to #1 007.7 on SP50 Board

TYPES JANCD-SP50-I , SP50-2 r 1 :;:; NN::ION

CN5

Ov

,

#llo2.

1

I

I

I

#llo2.2

#1102.3

#1102.4

I

I

#llo2.

5

I

#1102.6

[

I

‘2”{~

(30)

‘32){~

“’){~

I #llo3.1

#1103.2

#llo3.

#llo3.4

3

I

#1103.6

#llo3.7

‘36){~

(39) t

(42)

024 d

‘43’0”) ——————J

,

Notes :

1. This connection example shows +24 V common.

O V common is also available.

connection details.

Refer to Par.

18.3.2.3, SP50 Board for

2. The addresses are those for module No. 1-1. (#l 102.0 to #l 103.7). The address layouts for modules Nos. 2 to 8 are the same as shown above starting with newer addresses.

Refer to Appendix B (3), Address Classification for details.

Fig.

17.33

Connection to Address and Bit Nos

#1 102.0

to#1103.7

on SP50 Board

cONNEcT”R_c”’

1

~

&NW:~lON o J tillot.1

#1104.2

#llo4.3

#llo4.4

#llo4.

5

#1104.6

#llo4.7

#llo5.

o

#llo5.

#llo5.2

#no 5.3

$1105.4

#no 5.5

#1105-6

#llo5.7

I

{

I

[

1

1

1

}

J

I

1

(27)

(28)

<

(29)

(30)

<

(31)

(32)

(33)

(34) /

(

<

(43 TO 46)

\

/

(20)

<

(21)

<

<

(23)

(24)

<

(25)

(26)

Notes :

1. This connection example shows +24 V common.

O V common is also available.

connection details.

Refer to Par.

18.3.2.3, SP50 Board for

2. The addresses are those for module No. 1-1. (#1 104.0to#1105.7).

The address layouts for modules Nos. 2 to 8 are the same as shown above starting with newer addresses.

Refer to Appendix B (3), Address Classification for details,

Fig. 17.34

Connection to Address and Bit Nos.

#1 104.0

to#1105.7

on SP50 Board

84

— -—

fO/RESS ~1:

#1106.

O

#1106.

#1106.

1

2

#1106.

#1106.

#1106.5

3

4

#l Io6.6

#1106.

7

1

{

I v

+24V

T

I

I

I

CONNECTO; CN6

(42)

(43 TO 46)

(41)

(36)

(37)

(39)

(40)

(38)

<

-----@J

<

==a

——

Notes :

1. This connection example shows +24 V common.

O V common is also available.

connection details.

Refer to Par.

18.3.2.3, SP50 Board for

2. The addresses are those for module No. 1-1. (#1 106.0to#1106.7).

The address layouts for modules Nos. 2 to 8 are the same as shown above starting with newer addresses.

Refer to Appendix B (3), Address Classification for details.

Fig. 17.35

Connection to Address and Bit Nos.

#1 106.0

to#1106.7

on SP50 Board

17.3

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL-PURPOSE

1/0 SIGNALS

17.3.1

l/O PORTS

(1) The YASNAC J50 contains the programmable controller system

(PC).

External signals can deallocated toits I/O ports freely when the machine manufacturer designs a built-in PC.

For details, refer to Instruction Manual for YASNAC J50 PC System

(SIE-C843-12.1).

CNC UNIT

PANEL

I/o

NC

MAIN

PROCESSING

#1200 -

)

MACHINE

SEOUENCER

*lloo

#looo-

-

17.3.2

1/0 CIRCUITS OF 1/0 PORTS

17.3.2.1

1/0 MODULE TYPE JANCD-FC810/FC860

(1) Input Circuits

O V common and 24 V common can be set by an external device for the input circuit.

Internal power supply and external power supply can be used for 24 V power supply.

(a) When the internal power supply is used.

T-T

I

<

#1300 -

I y

GNERAL-

PURPOSE

1/0

#1116 -

lW-J

l,:HNE

(2)

AOORESSSET

Fig. 17,36 System Configuration

The general-purpose 1/0 ports are mounted on the 1/0 module types JANCD-FC8 10, FC860, FC861 and on the SP50 board of the CNC operator’s panel.

The numbers of 1/0 points of these modules are shown in Table

17.1.

Table 17.1

Numbers of 1/0 Points of Modules

Module Type

JANCD-

Fc810/Fc860

Input

Points

112 output

Points

96

Remarks

4

FCS61 64 56

For machine panels

SP50-1 I I 64

1

32

SP50-2 64 56

Notes :

1. YASNAC J50 needs one 1/0 board incorporated in a CNC operator’s panel

(S P50-1 or SP50-2).

Therefore, up to 3 board (max. inputs: 512 points, max.

outputs: 344 points) can be connected when only FC 810/FC860 is added.

Up to

7 boards (max. inputs: 512 points, max. outputs: 448 points) can be connected,

2. Each module can be used together with the other, However, an 1/0 mea number must not be overlapped.

(Refer to Appendix 2.) If any 1/0 area number is overlapped, alarm No. 374 occurs m status chunges to the input disabled status.

3. In order to muke it possible to add more modules, it is necessary for each 1/0 module to terminate the fhal board,

(3) Address Setting

The relationship between the address and connectors is indicated in Table 18.1. (This table applies to port 1.

If a different port is used, address changes are required.

#1012

#1013

#lo] 1 lrIput Output (JANCD,:;::::,

#I 007

#l 008

#1 009

#lolo

CN6 1

.

—

—

) (JANCD- ::8M )

#I 002

#loo3

#loo4

#1 005

#1006 v Table 17.2 Address and Connector

I CN5

:~

CN5

~ COM41

COM42

;.neral.

purpose

:JANCD-FC861)

::;

CN 1

:~

CN2

:~

~ COMOO

~ COM02

3 COM04

— :: I COM20

I/o

COMOI

COM03

—

#l loo

#llol

#llo2

#1103

CN4

CN4

CN5

CN5

#1 104 ICN6]

#1 105 ICN61

#1 I 06 icN6j

#1107

#1108

—

— i

CN3

CN2

CN1

CN 1

CN 1

CN 1

CN1

CN2

CN3

CN3

CN6

COM2 1

COM 10

CN

CN

I

1

CN2

CN2

CN3

CN3

CN3

&“)+E

O

V

Common

I

t----l

L-J

+24

V

Common

Fig. 17,37 Internal Input Circuits

(b) When the external power supply is used.

I

024

O

V

Common

l-.----+--

1+

L.d

0,,

I

,

I

+24 V

Common

Fig. 17.38

External Input Circuits

Note :

“Common” in the input circuit (for example, COM1O, COM20, COM21...total

9) cuu be either “+24

V common”’or

“O V common” for every 8 or 16 input points as mentioned in Par.

17.3 1/0 signal interface and can be selected freely.

Set by wiring on the cable side.

85

1N64JOUT56

17.3.2.1

1/0 MODULE TYPE JANCD-FC81 O/FC860 (Cent’d)

(2) Output Circuits

An noncontact wity polarity is used for outputs.

Current under operation must be 60 mA max (per circuit).

Internal power supply and external power supply can be used for 24 V power supply.

(a) When the internal power supply is used.

r

+ 24V ~

CN7-1

1

CN7-2

O.rl

24EX

$==

+70v ;

I

I

L-–O:~~

Fig. 17.39

Internal Output Circuit

+

LOAD

—

I

(b) When the external power supply is used.

(a) When the Internal power supply is used.

CNINT _

~—1

–

+24V -

24 V

~

E e

10.2mA

RV o,,

I

F

O V Common

—

I

7 O,<v

—

I

CPS

–18 FB

“t-

‘b-–-l

+24 V Common

Fig. 17.41

Internal Input Circuits

(b) When the external power supply is used.

FER;Um

~ov + 24V

I cNExT

~y~l-+24V

‘1

-

L

COM

1

r-”t!~-?

~OWER sup;LU

I

0,+

024 r

—-—-d

Fig. 17.40

External Output Circuit

Notes :

1. All 96 output points are transistor source driver outputs, The current when ON should be maximum 60 mA per circuit.

2. Every 8 points out of 96 outputs can be connected to some external power supplies.

3.When tilving to LEDs with internal power supply, the current of all the 1/0 circuits should be 3.5 A max.

17.3.2.2

1/0 MODULE TYPE JANCD-FC861

(1) Input Circuits

O V common and +24 V common can be set by an external device for the input circuit.

Internal power supply and external power supply can be used for 24 V power supply.

When internal power supply is used.

mount power supply selection connector on CNINT.

When external power supply is used, mount power supply selection connector on CNINT.

w

%.2mA

COM

RV

I

L

+24 V Common

— — -1

Fig. 17.42

External Input Circuits

Note :

“Common” in the input circuit (for example, COM 10, COM20, COM2 1...total

9) can be either “+24 V common” or “O V common” for every 8 or 16 input points as mentioned in Par, 17.3 1/0 signal interface and can be selected freely.

Set by wiring on the cable side.

(2) Output Circuits

A nonncontact with polarity is used for outputs. Current under operation must be at most 60 mA (per circuit).

Internal power supply and external power supply can be used for 24 V power supply.

(a) When the internal power supply is used,

~.—–

CNINT

+ 24V

Jp

I

+

ox

I I

L-–-J

Fig.

17.43

Internal Output Circuit

(b) When the external power supply is used.

— — —

7

CNEXT

POtiER

I suEP~

+24V OV

I

I

CN 15-3

—

__-..-!

Fig, 17.44

External Output Circuit

17.3.2.3

SP50 BOARD (TYPE JANCD-SP50)

(1) Input Circuits

— r

L

(+

5.lmA

C

COM

~-

0%

F + 24V

‘v

~

k g

5.lmA

0 V Common

r–-

h

0.

+ 24”

1+

RV

I

L–_–––––

+24 V Common

Fig. 17.45

Input Circuits

(2) Output Circuits (with Internal Power Supply)

SP50 BOARD

‘-=1 TI

Notes :

1.

All 56 output points are polarized contactless (transistorized source driver) outputs. The current when ON should be maximum

60 mA per circuit.

2. When driving the LEDs with internal power supply, the current of all the 1/0 circuits should be max. 3.5 A.

L-—

1 t

I

z

-JJ’

Ov

+’

0,4

Fig. 17.46

Output Circuit

Note :

A noncontact with polarity is used for 56 outputs,

Current under operation must beat most 60 mA (per circuit).

17.3.3

POWER SUPPLY FOR 1/0 SIGNALS

(1) Internal power Sunpply

Internal power supply +24 V for 1/0 signals should be provided by the machine tool builder.

If internal power supply is used, calculate the load current according to 1/0 points and confirm that the current is within the allowable current value since there is a current capacity limit according to 1/0 ON points.

The allowable current capacity of the internal power supply is 1.5A.

●

Unit consumed current (When internal power supply is used) :0.1

A

●

Panel 1/0 JANCD-SP50- 1, SP50-2 consumed current (When internal power is used)

Input current (l-point)

Output current (1-point)

:5.1 mA (at ON)

:60 mA max

(differs from load.)

●

General-purpose 1/0 signal 1/0 module JANCD-FC8 10, FC860,

FC861 consumed current

Input current (l-point)

Output current (l-point)

(differs from load.)

:10.2 mA (at ON)

:60 mA max

(Example of Calculation)

When JANCD-SP50-1 All 1/0 output are ON with LED load

(2.7kQ):

5.1 mAx64=326.4

mA (JANCD-SP50- 1 imput comsumed current)

24 V/2.7 kx32=28.4 mA (JANCD-SP50- 1 output comsumed current)

1500 mA-326 mA-284 mA-100 mA=790 mA (possible supply current)

If the internal power supply is connectedtoJANCD-FC810 under these conditions, overcurrent alarm of the internal power supply

(CPS18F) occurs to the input ON of 77 points or above.

790 mA/10.2 mA=77 points

(2) Specifications of External Power Supply

Voltage :24 VDC t5%

Ripple :1070 (P-P)

Provide external supply with the above.

18. CABLES

18.1 LIST OF CABLES

The interface cable are furnished with or without connectors.

Those cables shown in Table 18.1 are available.

If the machine builder is supplying the cables, prepare equivalent cables based on the cable specifications.

Cable N CableTy

.

Connector Cable Type

CABLE-CL: ““~~

L

L

Cable Length

0.5. ~.

L=5m

Cable Type

Table 18.1

List of Cables

Configuration

(

Type 1012O-3OOOVE Type 1OI2O-3OOOVE

Remarks

1/0

CRT panel signal

UL 20276 AWG 28 x 10 pairs

(Characteristic impedance: 120!2)

Type MRE-20M01(G)

(

Type 1012O-3OOOVE

)(

Type MR-20L

)

Spindle drive unit feed back

UL 20276 AWG 28 x 10 pairs

( Type 10126-3OOOVE Type 10156-3OOOVE

Servo drive unit

UL 20276 AWG 28 x 13 pairs

( Type 10126-3OOOVE Type MRF-50F01

)

Spindle drive unit

UL 20276 AWG 28 x 13 pairs

( Type 10126-3OOOVE Type MS3108B2O-29S

)

Servomotor

Optical encoder

( Type 10120-3000VE Type MS3108B2O-29S

)

UL 20276 AWG 28 x 10 pairs

( Type 1012O-3OOOVE

, Mamplifier

UL 20276 AWG 28 x 10 pairs

Spindle optical encoder

Manual pulse generator

CABLE-JK.’”:

LGF-011-100

89

Cable No.

2able Type

*

*

*

*

Table 18.1 List of Cables (Cent’d)

Configuration

Type 1-178288-5 Type 172026-1

Type 172026-1 Type 172026-1

Type VCT DE 8402398

2mm2x5 cores

Connector: 10120-3000VE

1032O-52AO-OO8

Cable : UL 20276 AWG 28x1Ocores

Connector : MRP-50F01

MR-50L

Cable : KQVV-SB DE 8400095

0.2 mm’x 50 cores

Connector: MRP-20F01

MR-20L

Cable : KQVV DE 6428673

0.2 mm’X20 cores

Connector: 172025-1

(

Cable : VCT D: 8402398

0.2 mm x 5 cores

Type MRP-8F01

Type MR-8L )(

Type MRP-8F01

Type MR-8L )

KEV SB 0.2x 1 core

(Characteristic impedance: 120C2)

(

Type MRP-20F01(G) TypeMS3108B2O-29S

Type MR-20L )(

Type MR3057-12A )

KQVV-SB DE 8400093

0.2 m: X 10 pairs

Connector : FRC2-AA50-20S

Cable : B-50S61.OM

*

* Conector and cable are separately provided

Connector : FRC2-AA20-20S

Cable : B-20S 60.OM

Remarks

1/0 Power supply

1/0 Power supply

Direct-IN

Closing sequence

RS-232C interface

(Tape reader unit)

1/0 (FC81O,FC861)

1/0 (FC8 10)

AC power supply

1/0

Spindle optical encoder connection

1/0 (FC860, FC861, SP50)

1/0 (FC860)

18.2 SPECIFICATIONS OF CABLE

(1) Cable Dwg. No. DE8400093 (Type KQVV-SB, 0.2 mm’ x 10 pairs)

No. of Pairs

Table 18.2

Construction

Material

10

Tinned annealed copper stranded wire

0.2

Conductor

Winding

P

Shield

Material and Color

Sheath

Thickness

Finished Cable Diameter

Armrox. Mass mm mm k~ikm

16/0.12

0.55

Cross-linked vinyl

0.3

Paper tape lap winding

Pitch: 18,22,25, 32

T]rrnedannealed copper stranded wire

Vinyl, black

1.2

10.0

130

Table 18,3 Characteristics

Max. Conduction Resistance (20V) fVkml 113

Min. Insulation Resistance (20V)

Withstand Voltage

Continuous Operation Temperature Range

Mfl.km

50

VAC/min I 1000

~ -30 to +60

. Layout of 10 Pairs

Pair No.

I Colors

(2) Cable Dwg. No. DE8400095 (Type KQVV-SB, 0.2 mm’x 50 cores)

Table 18,4 Construction

No. of Cable Cores

Material

50

Tinned annealed - copper stranded wire

Conductor

Nominal Sectional

Area mm z

No. of Conductors uer mm

Dimensions mm

0.2

16/0.12

Insulation

Material

Thickness mm

0.55

Cross-linked vinyl

0.3

Winding Paper tape lap winding

Sheath

Approx. Mass

Material and Color

Thickness

Finished Cable Diameter

Soft Vinyl, black mm 1.2

mm I Approx. 13 kg/cm 230

Table 18,5 Characteristics

Max. Conduction Resistance (20C)

Min. Insulation Resistance (20C)

Withstand Voltage

Continuous Operation Temperature Range

Wkrnl 113

Mfl.kml 50

VAC/min 1000 c -30 to +60

. Details of Cable DWG.

No. DE8400095

Note :

Drain wires of 0.2mm’ are provided inside tinned annealedcopper stranded wire.

*

6

‘1

8

I Blue/Brown

,

I

Yellow/Brown

Green/Brown

(3) Cable Dwg. No. DE6428673 (Type KQVV, 0.2 mm’ x 20 cores)

Table 18.6 Construction

No. of Cable Cores

Conductor

I 20

Material

Tinned annealed copper stranded wire

Nominal Sectional

Area mm z

No. of Conductors uer mm mm

I Dimensions

0.2

16/0.12

mm I 0.55

Insulation

Material

Thickness mm

Cross-linked vinyl

I 0.3

Winding

Sheath

Finished Cable Diameter

Approx. Mass

Material and Color

Thickness

Paper tape lap winding

Soft Vinyl, black mm I 1.2

mm 8.0

kg/cm ] 90

91

Table 18.7

Characteristics

Max. Conduction Resistance (20K2

Min. Insulation Resistance (20C)

Withstand Voltage

.Q/kml 113

Mf2.km 50

VAC/min 1000

Continuous Operation Temperature Range r -30 to +60

Details of Cable

No. DE6428673

White

92

(4) Cable Dwg. No. DE8402398 (Type VCT, 2 mm’ x 5 cores)

No.

of

Pairs

Material

Table 18.8 Construction

5

Tinned annealed copper stranded wire

Nominal Sectional

2.0

Conductor

~

Insulation

Sheath

I Thickness

-

Diameter

Finished Cable Diameter mm mm mm

37/0.26

1.8

Insulation vinyl

0.8

3.4

Right twisted

(outerdiameterappmx.9.2mm)

Vinyl, block

Approx. 1.9

Armrox. 13.t)

Table 18.9 Characteristics

Max. Conduction Resistance (20’C)

Min. Insulation Resistance (20C)

Withstand Voltage

Q/kml 10.2

Mi2.km 500rmore

VAC/min 3000

Continuous Operation Temperature Range C Oto+60

. Details of Cable Dwg. No. DE8402398

5X white

.... ...0

.: ~:o.

. .. .

Yellow Red

7

VINYL SHEATH

/ INCLUSION

Q!!z’

18.3

LIST OF CONNECTORS

(1) CNC UNIT

Table 18.10

Connectors for CNC Unit

CNC Unit Type

CPS-18FB

JANCD-SR 50-1

JANCD-SR 50-2

JANCD-SR 50-3

JANCD-SR 51

JANCD-CP 50

JANCD-PC 50

:onnecl

No.

CNI

CN2

CN3

CN30

CN31

CN32

CN33

CN30

CN31

CN33

CN34

CN35

CN30

CN31

CN32

CN33

CN34

CN35

CN36

CN20

CN1O

CN1l

CN12

CN13

Connector Type for Board Side

172040-1 (5 pins)

172040-1 (5 pins)

172039-1 (7 pins)

10226-52A 2 JL (26piIIS)

10226-52A 2 JL (26piIIS)

10220-52A 2 JL (20piIIS)

10226-52A 2 JL (26pins)

Connector Type

172026-1

172026-1

172025-1

Cable Side

Case Type ContactorTW

170289-1

170289-1or

170289-1

10226-52A 2 JL (26pins)

10226-52A 2 JL (26pills)

10226-52A 2 JL (26pklS)

10226-52A 2 JL (26piIIS)

10226-52A 2 JL (26pinS) lo126-mvE(lo12&aClm) 1037652 AWI38(10326-A2CQO3)

1012&3W13VJ3(10126-6tXKI lZL) 10?2652AO4II3 (1032&%M!-@

I01K3WK3VE( 10126-KKK3EQ 1032652 AOC@3(1032&.A2fIN3)

—

—

—

10226-52A 2 JL (26pfi)

10226-52A 2 JL (26pkls)

EL) 1032&52 —

101263CQ3VE(1OI2MXI3EL)103M52AWXR(103%MO3.CO) —

10220-52A 2 JL (20piIIS) lo120-m VE (1012WXUIEL) 1032D52AWD3 —

10226-52A 2 JL (26pti)

10220-52A 2 JL (20pinS)

10226-52A 2 JL (26pfi) lo12&3J3WlvE(lo126 (10326-A2IXW3)—

1012G3(HIVE(IO1XMWOEL)1032O-52AOJXB —

10226-52A 2 JL (26piIIS)

10220-52A 2 JL (20pti)

10220-52A 2 JL (20pinS)

1022@52A 2 JL (20piIIS)

1022052A 2 JL (20pti)

M&8RMA 4 (8 pills) W-8F01 MR43L

No connector is provided

MRP-F112

Manufacturer

AMP

3M

3M

3M

3M

3M

3M

3M

3M

HONDA

JANCD-MM51

Note :

Connectors for the cable side are not attached to the cables.

The machhe builder must suppiy equivalent connectors.

Connector Position

JZNC-JRK 00

—

u

JR 50 CPS-18FB

I YASNAC I

F o

0

0 o

0

Fig. 18.1

ConnectorLayout(JZNC-JRKOO)

(2) CNC Operator’s Panel

CNC Panel Type

JANCD-SP 50-1

JANCD-SP 50-2

Connector

No.

CN1

CN2

CN3

CN4

CN5

CN6

Table 18.11

Connectors for CNC Operator’s Panel

Connector Type forBoardSide

1022O-62O2JL(20 pins) lo120-3030vE(lol~

1-178315-2 (5 pins)

Connector Type

1-178288-5

FRc2-c50s12m (50pii) FRC2-AA 50-20

FRC2<50S12-OS(50Pii) FRC2-AA 50-20

FRC2.C50S124S(50pirrs)FRC2-AA 50-20

Cable

Side

Case Type

Note:

Connectors for the cable side are not attached to the cables.

The machine builder must supply equivalent connectors.

ContactorType Manufacturer

—

175218-2

3M

3M

AMP

DDK

DDK

DDK

Fig. 18.2

Connector Layout of CNC Operator’s Panel (Type JANCD-SP50-I, -2)

(3) 1/0 Module Connector

Table 18.12

Connectors for 1/0 Module

1/0 Modeule Type

JANCD-FC81o

JANCD-FC860

JANCD-FC86 I

Ionnect(

No.

CN1

CN2

CN3

CN4

CN5

CN6

CN1l

CN12

CN13

CN14

CN 1

CN2

CN3

CN1l

CN12

CN13

CN14

CN15

CN1

CN2

CN3

CN4

CN5

CN6

CN1l

CN12

CN13

CN14

Connector Type foR Board

Side

MR-50RMD 2 (50pins)

MR-20RMD 2 (20pins)

MR50 RMD 2 (50pins)

MR-50RMD 2 (50 pins)

MR-50RMD 2 (50 pins) m-50 RMD 2 (50pins)

MR-8 RMA 4 (8 pins)

MR-8 RMA 4 (8 pins)

172040-1 (5 pins)

172040-1 (5 pins)

Connector Type

MRP-50F 01

MRP-20F 01

MRP-50F 01

MRP-50F 01

MRP-50F 01

MRP-50F 01

MRF-qF 01

MRP-qF 01

172026-1

172026-1

Cable Side

MR-50L

MR-20L

MR-50L

MR-50L

MR-50L

MR-50L

MR-8L

MR-8L

Case T~

FRC2-

ERC24XlS 124)L(Wpti

MR-8RMD 2 (8 pins)

MR-8RMD 2 (8 pins)

172037-1(5 pins)

172037-1(5 pins)

MR-50RMD 2 (50pins)

MR-8 RMA 2 (8 pins)

MR-8 RMA 2 (8 pins)

172037-1(5 pins)

172037-1(5 pins)

1-178313-2(3 pins)

FRC2-AA 50-20S

FRC2-AA 20-20s

FRC2-AA 50-20S

FRC2-AA 50-20S

FRC2-AA 50-20S

FRC2-AA 50-20S

MRP-8F01

MRP-8F01

172026-1

172026-1

FRC2-AA 50-20S

FRC2-AA 20-20s

MRP-50F01

MRP-8F01

MRP-8F01

172060-1

172060-1

1-178288-3

MR-8L

MR-8L

MR-50L

MR-8L

MR-8L

Note :

Connectors for the cable side are not attached to the cables.

The machine builder must supply equivalent connectors.

~ontactorTypt tianufacturer

MRP-F112

MRP-F112

MRf-Fl 12

MRP-F112

MRF-F112

MRF-F112

MRP-F112

MRP-F112

170289-1

170289-1

HONDA

HONDA

HONDA

HONDA

HONDA

HONDA

HONDA

HONDA

AMP

AMP

MRP-F112

MRE-FI 12

170289-1

170289-1

MRP-F112

MRP-F112

MRP-F112

170289-1

170289-1

175217-2

DDK

DDK

DDK

DDK

DDK

DDK

HONDA

HONDA

AMP

AMP

DDK

DDK

HONDA

HONDA

HONDA

AMP

AMP

AMP

Fig. 18.3 Connector Layout of 1/0 Module (JANCD-FC81 O)

+

-+

TYPE JANCD-FC860

Fig. 16.4

Connector Layout of 1/0 Module (JANCD-FC860)

+

%?!%! “ma~

CN13 CN14

TYPE JANCD-FC861

FG

CN15

1

Fig. 18.5 Connector Layout ofl/OModule (JANCD-FC861)

~~ +’-

<:

A.?

,

(4) Drive Unit

Unit Type

SGDB;””’AD::

CIMR-VM3: .:

Connector

No.

CN1

CN2

1CN

2CN

3CN

Table 18.13

Connectors for Drive Unit

1025O-52A2JL 10150-3000VE

1022O-52A2JL 10120-3000VE

~-50

ConnectorType for BoardSide

RMA(G)(50pklS)

MlV20RFA(G)(20pins)

~-20 RMA(G)(20pklS)

Connector Type

MRP-50 FO1(G)

MRP-20 MO1(G)

MRP-20 FO1(G)

Cable Side

Case Type

1035O-52AO-OO8

1032O-52AO-OO8

MR-50L

MR-20L

MR-20L

Note :

Connectors for the cable side are not attached to the cables,

The machine builder must supply equivalent connectors.

ContactorType Manufacturer

3M

3M

HONDA

HONDA

HONDA

T__F

P

i

(a) SGDB-:’’:AD’”:

Fig. 18.6 Connector Layout of Drive Unit

(b) CIMR-VM3

97

18.4 SHORTING PIN SETUPS

“ JANCD-CP50

SW1 : System number switch (16-position rotary switch)

SW1 [0] - Normal operation mode

[1] - Parameter change mode

[4] - Ladder edit mode

Note :

Positions [2], [3], and [5] through [F] of switch SW1 are for maintenance use only.

No one should be allowed to use these switch positions except a qualified YASKAWA representative.

“ JANCD-PC50

Panel swith ON function selector switch

SW2

OFF/ON

123 o-l sw3\oolo

GEIziEJ

SW2

OFF/ON

123 o-l

SW3 pqo

“ JANCD-SR50-1 (-2) (-3), SR51

D/A voltage adjustment trimmers : Factory-adjusted prior to shipment.

No further adjustments are needed.

<SR 50-1>

VR1: First servo axis zero adjustment

VR2: First servo axis gain adjustment

VR3: Second servo axis zero adjustment

VR4: Second servo axis gain adjustment

VR5: First spindle zero adjustment

VR6: First spindle gain adjustment

<SR50-2, -3>

VR 1: First servo axis zero adjustment

VR2: First servo axis gein adjustment

VR3: Second servo axis zero adjustment

VR4: Second servo axis gain adjustment

VR5: Third servo axis (first spindle) zero adjustment

VR6: Third servo axis (first spindle) gain adjustment

VR7: Second spindle zero adjustment

VR8: Second spindle gain adjustment

<SR51>

VR1: Third (forth) servo axis zero adjustment

VR2: Third (forth) servo axis gain adjustment

1/0 address of 1/0 port(SP50,FC861,FC810,

For details, refer to Appendix B.

FC860) each module can be set by rotary switch (SW1).

19. J50L STANDARD 1/0 SIGNALS

19.1

LIST OF NC STANDARD [/0 SIGNALS

Standard input/output signals are listed below.

For custom-built signals depending on the system, refer to the list of 1/0 signals provided for that particular system.

Input Signals (PLC-+NC)

#1 300

D7

EDT

EDIT

Dlj

MEM

MEMORY

D5

MDI

MANUAL

DATA

INPUT

D4

T

TAPE

#1301 MP 1 ROV 2 ROV 1

~’

RAPID SPEED OVERRIDE

DISPLAY

D7 D6

0000111

T

Contact open

D5 D4 D3 D2

T

Contact closed

D1

D3 D2

H/s

HANDLE/

STEP

DI

J

MANUAL

JOG

DO

RPD

MANUAL

RAPID

TRAVERSE

FV16 FV 8 FV 4

FEEDRATE OVERRIDE/MANUAL

FV 2

JOG SPEED

FV 1

DO

1

#1 302 HZ

——’

MANUAL PG

AXIS SELECT

HX

#1 303 INHEDT

INHIBIT

EDIT

AFL

M.S.T

LOCK

-z

A13S

MANUAL

ABS.

+Z -x

,

MANUAL TRAVERSE AXIS

DIRECTION SELECT

DRN

DRY

RUN

+x MP 4 MP 2

‘ ~’

MANUAL PG

MULTIPLY SELECT

BDT

BLOCK

DELETE

DLK

DISPLAY

LOCK

MLK

MACHINE

LOCK

SBK

SINGLE

BLOCK

#1 304 ZRN

RETURN

TO

REFED-

ENCE

CDZ

THREAD

CUT UP

#l 305 ERR1 ERRO

——J

EXTERNAL ERROR

INPUT

#1 306

#l 307

SAGR

SPINDLE

SPEED

AGREE-

MENT

GRS

DURING

GEAR

SHIFT

GSC

SMZ

ERROR

DETECT

ON

RWDH

HIGH-SPEED

REWIND

SRN

SETUP

POINT

RETURN

STLK lNTER-

LOCK

START

RWD

REWIND

EOP

ENDOF

PROGRAM

*DCZ *DCX

~’

DECREASE INPUT FOR

REFERENCE POINT

‘

*-LZ

ERS FIN

EXTERNAL MST

RESET COMPLETED

*+LZ

*-LX v

OVERTRAVELINPUT

MRD

MACHINE

READY

~

*+LX

,

SSTP

SPINDLE

SPEED

SPINDLE

COMMAND

CONSTANT “O”

PST

CURRENT

POSITION

SET

*SP

FEED

HOLD

ST

CYCLE

START

SINV

SPINDLE

COMMAND

INVERT

L

GR 4 GR 3

SPINDLEGEARRANGE

GR 2

SELECT

GR 1

,

#1 308

#1 309

[

EOUT EVER

NC

PROGRAM B:OGRAM

PUNCH

VERIFY

OUT

BDT 9 BDT 8

EIN

NC

PROGRAM

STORE

BDT 7

DRSZ

DISPLAY

DRSX

RESET

,

BDT 6

OPTIONALB~OCK

BDT 5

DELETE

BDT 4 BDT 3

EXTC

TIME

COUNT

BDT 2

#1310

D7 Dlj D5 D4 D3 D2 DI

I

WN16 I WN8 I WN4 I WN2

I

WN1 I SPC \

)

EXTERNAL WORK NUMBER SEARCH

SPB I

SPINDLE OVERRIDE

DO

SPA I

#1311

#1312 SETREQ

:::T;;NATE

SETTING

INPUT

#1313

ESCLR

FS DATA

CLEAR

FSCH

FS

MEMORY

CHANGE

FSMEM

FS

MEMORY

CPRN

CUTTING

INTERRUPT

POINT

RETURN

HOFS

HANDLE

OFFSET

MIX

X AXIS

MIRROR

IMAGE

PRST

PROGRAM

RESTART

Ovc

OVERRIDE

CANCEL

.

COV 16 COV 8 Cov 4 Cov 2

,’

MULTIPLE CANNED CYCLE CUTTING OVERRIDE

Cov 1

,

FSCM

FS

EDIT

MODE

#1314

#1315

#1316 I SID8 I SID7 I

SID13 I

SID5 I SID4 I

SPINDLE INDEX POSITION SET

SI133 I SID2 i SIDI

,

I

#1317

#1318

#1319

TP 8 TP 4 TP 2

TOOL NO. SET-FOR STORED

STROKE LIMIT

TP 1

TLTM

TIME

COUNT

ROV 4

RAPID

OVERRIDE

~’

TLSKP

TOOL

SKIP

SIGNAL FOR TOOL

LIFE CONTROL

SPE

EXTEND

SPINDLE

OVERRIDE

SPD

SID 12 SID 11 SID 10 SID 9

TLRST

TOOL

RESET

,

SIDXI

SPINDLE

INDEX

RESTART

SIDXING

SPINDLE

INDEX

~&~!ON

MENTAL

DESIGNA-

TION

TPS

TOOL NO

CHANGE

FOR S. S.

LIMIT

SIDX

SPINDLE

INDEXING

TLA 16 TLA 8 TLA 4 TLA 2

“

CHANGE TOOL NO. (TOOL LIFE CONTROL)

TLA 1

,

19.1

LIST OF NC STANDARD

Input Signals (PLC+NC)

1/0 SIGNALS (Cent’d)

D7 Dfj D5 D4

#1 320

D3 D2 DI Do

1

#1321

#1 322 SONPB

SERVO

POWER

ON

#1323 (R18 SDI 7) (UI 7 SDI 6) (R16 SDI 5) (R15 SDI 4 (R14 SDI 3) (R13 SDI 2) (R12 SDI 1) (UI 1 SDI O)

EXTERNAL INPUT OF S-COMMAND (S4 DIGIT) NO, 1

1

#1 324 I (SDI 15) (SDI 14) (SDI 13) (SDI 12) IR112 (SDI ll)IRII1(SDI 10) I RIIO (SD19)]RI 9 (SD18) I

EXTERNAL INPUT FOR S-COMMAND (S4 DIGIT) NO. 2

#1 325 I UI 7 UI 6 UI 5 UI 4 UI 3 UI 2

INPUT FOR “MACRO PROGRAM NO, 1

UI 1 UI o 1

#1 326 I UI15 \ U114 I U113 I UI12 I Ulll I UI1O

INPUT FOR “MACRO PROGRAM” NO. 2

I U19 I U18

,

I

#1 327 ED 7 ED 6

#1 328 ED 15 ED 14

ED 5 ED 4

ED3

EXTERNAL DATA INPUT NO. 1

ED 2

ED13 ED 12 ED1l

EXTERNAL DATA INPUT NO. 2

ED1O

ED 1

ED 9

ED O

ED 8

#1 329

\

EDCL EDS 2 EDS 1 EDS O EDSD EDSC

CONTROL SIGNAL FOR EXTERNAL DATA INPUT

EDSB EDSA

,

Output Signals (NC+PLC)

#1

200

D7

M

28

D6

M 24

D5

M 22

D4

M 21

D3

M 18

M FUNCTION”BCD OUTPUT

D2

M 14

DI

M12

DO

Mll

#1 201 M30R M02R MOIR MOOR

M 30 M 02 ‘MO1 M 00

DECODE DECODE DECODE DECODE

OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT

M 38 M 34 M 32 M 31

#1 202

#1 203

I

TF

T-FUNC-

TION

SAMPL-

ING

OUTPUT

#1 204 S 28

I

SF

S-FUNC-

TION

SAMPL-

ING

OUTPUT

EDTS

EDIT

OPERAT-

ING

STATUS

I

MF

M-FUNC-

TION

SAMPL-

ING

OUTPUT

AUTO

AUTO

MODE

STATUS

S 24

1 s

22

SINVA

S4

DIGIT OUT

INVERT

STATUS

IER

INPUT

ERROR

OUTPUT

*ESPS

EMERGENCY

STOP

OUTPUT

I

MAN

MANUAL

MODE

STATUS

I

THC

THREAD

CUTTING

STATUS

I

RWDS

REWIND

STATUS s 21 S18 S14

RST

RESET

OUT-

PUT

ALM

ALARM

OUTPUT

I

OP

FEEDING

1

DEN

POSITION-

ING END

I

S12 Sll

S-FUNCTION BCD OUTPUT

#1 205 T 28 T 24 T 22 T21

T-FUNCTIONBCD

T18

OUTPUT

T14

#1 206 2 ZPZ 2 ZPX

Z AXIS

L

X AXIS

NO.2 RE;ERENCE’

POSITION

#1 207

ZPZ ZPX

.

Z AXIS X AXIS

REFERENCE

POSITION

,

T12 Tll

SPL

FEED

HOLD

LAMP

STL

CYCLE

START

LAMP

#1216 R 08 (SDO 7) R 07 (SDO 6) R 06 (SDO 5) R 05 (SDO 4) R 04 (SDO 3) R 03 (SDO 2) R 02 (SDO 1) R 01 (SDO O)

\ )

EXTERNAL OUTPUT FOR S~COMMAND (S4 DIGIT) NO. 1

#1217

\

(SDO 15) (SDO 14) (SDO 13) (SDO 12) IRO 12(SDOI1)]RO11(SDO10)] v

EXTERNAL OUTPUT FOR S-COMMAND

RO1O(SDO9) I R 09(SD08)

(S 4 DIGIT) NO, 2

,

I

#1218 FSCE

FS MEMORY

CHANGE

END

FSMD

DURING

FS EDIT

MODE

ASF G96S

S-COMMAND :::::ST~T

(S 4 DIGIT)

ANALOG SF SpEED

CONTROL

102

19.1

LIST OF NC STANDARD 1/0 SIGNALS

(Cent’d)

Input Signals (NC-+PLC)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 DI Do

#1219 ESEND

EXTERNAL

DATA

SEARCH

COMPLE-

TION

EREND

;~;~RNAL

INPUT

COMPLE-

TION

SETEND

COORDINATE

SYSTEM

SETTING

END

TLCH

TOOL

CHANGE

COMMAND

(TOOL LIFE

CONTROL)

SIDXO

SPINDLE

INDEX

EXECUT.

,NG

TRSA

STORED

STROKE

LIMIT

AREA

CHANGE

END

SIDXA

SPINDLE

INDEX

END

#1 220

1

Uo

7 UO 6 Uo 5 Uo 4 Uo 3 Uo 2 Uo 1 Uo o

OUTPUT FOR “MACRO PROGRAM” NO. 1

#1221

.

U015 U014 U013 Uo 12 Uoll Uolo

OUTPUT FOR “MACRO PROGRAM” NO. 2

Uo 9 UO 8

)

#1 222

#1 223

#1 224

.

MD 7

Monitor Signals

MD 6

FSC LRE

FS DATA

CLEAR

END

MD 5 MD 4

HIGH-SPEED

MD 3

M-FUNCTION

#1 280

.

Ssw 3 Ssw 2 Ssw 1

SYSTEM NUMBER SWITCH

Ssw o

,

MD 2

#1281

#1 282 IHP7

MD 1

(

MD O

,

SKIP

SKIP

INPUT

POWER

OFF PB.

IHP6

I ONPB I *OLD ] SVAM I “ESP I *OHT I

POWER

ON PB

OVER-

LOAD

SERVO

ALARM

EMER-

GENCY

STOP

OVER-

HEAT

IHPI IHP5 IHP4 IHP3 IHP2

MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR MONITOR

#1 283 SET 3 SET 2 SET

# 62I9 MONITOR

1 SET O

#1 284

1

SVMX SVMX

.

.—

SERVO POWER ON

(= “NRD”)

#1 285 o 0 0 0 0

CONSfANT “1“

0 0

1

103

#1 286

D7

0

D6

0

D5

0

D4

0

CONSTANT “O”

D3

0

D2

0

DI

0

Do

0

#1 287 Pcs

PHASE-C

PBS

PHASE-B

PAS

PHASE-A

SPINDLE PG FEED BACK MONITOR

#1 288

#1 289

TGONX

X-AXIS

TGON

TGONZ

Z-AXIS

TGON

#1 290 SCOM 28

PCY

PHASE-C

PBX

PHASE-B

X-AXIS PG

FEED BACK MONITOR

PAX

PHASE-A

Pcz

PHASE-C

PBZ

PHASE-B

Z-AXIS PG

FEED BACK MONITOR

PAZ

PHASE-A

SCOM 24 SCOM 22

*ALX

*ALZ *OLZ FUZ SRDZ

MONITOR FOR SERVO UNIT OF Z-AXIS

SCOM 21 SCOM 18

S-COMMAND MONITOR

*OLX

MONITOR FOR SERVO UNIT OF X-AXIS

SCOM 14

FUX

SCOM 12

SRDX

SCOM 11

#1 291 \

1

SCOM 48 I 1 SCOM 44

I

I SCOM 42

I

I SCOM 41

I

I SCOM 38 I SCOM 34 I SCOM 32 I SCOM 31 I

#1 292 SO 28 S() 24 so 22 so 21 S018

SPINDLE OUTPUT MONITOR so 14 so 12 Soil

#1 293 so 48 so 44 SO 42 so 41 so 3a

SPINDLE OUTPUT MONITOR so 34 SO 32 Soil

#1 294 ALM 28 ALM 24 ALM 22 ALM 21 ALM 18

ALARM OUTPUT MONITOR

ALM 14 ALM 12 ALM 11

#1 295 ALM 38 ALM 34 ALM 32

ALARM CODE MONITOR

ALM 31

#1 296 INHEDTT AFLT ABST PRNT BDTT

#6000 MONITOR

DLKT MLKT SBKT i

19.2 DETAILS OF SIGNALS

19.2.1

INPUT SIGNALS FOR CYCLE START (ST),

STOP (*SP) OUTPUT SIGNALS DURING CYCLE

START (STL) AND FEEDHOLD (SPL)

(1) With the control in any of the TAPE, MEMORY, and MDI modes, when the input contact ST is closed, the control starts automatic operation control to execute the part program, and at the same time, turn on the STL output signal for cycle start.

However, an ST input is neglected under the following condition.

While the control is in an alamr state.

(While an alarm output or an input error output is on.)

While the feedhold *SP input contact is open.

. While the external reset ERS input contact is closed.

While the RESET button on the MDI & CRT panel is being pushed.

. While the system No. switch is in any state except for O and 4.

(2) When the following state is entered after cycle start, the control completes operation control, and turns off the STL output.

. When a part program has been executed by manual data input in the MDI mode.

. When one block of a part program has been executed with the single block (SBK) input contact closed.

~When the program end (EOP) input contact has been closed by an M command of a part program.

(3) When the feedhold input contact “*SP” is opened during automatic operation, the automatically controlled motions, etc.

are interrupted, and at the same time the cycle start output STL is turned OFF and the feedhold output SPL is turned ON.

While a block of thread cutting instruction is being executed, the feedhold input is neglected, unless the control is equipped with Thread Interruption function.

(4) When the feedhold input contact *SP is closed, and cycle start input contact ST is closed, temporary stop SPL is turned OFF, and automatic operation is restarted.

The cycle start output

STL is turned ON also.

Timing chart for input of cycle start (ST), feedhold (*SP), and cycle start (STL)and temporary stop (SPL) is shown in Fig.

19.1.

*Asterisked signals activate at LOW.

(Normally closed contacts)

ST

:::g~

STL

~

“SP

SPL

CLOSED

OPENED

ON

OFF

CONTROL

STATE

I

I

I

1 u

I

I

I

~~E&’ CYCLE START

I

I

I

-1

FEEDHOLD

I

I

I

I

I

11

CYCLE START

Fig. 19.1

Notes :

1. Be sure to keep the cycle start (ST) and feedhold (*SP) input contacts closed or open at least for 100 ms. If the duration is shorter than this, the input may sometimes be neglected.

2. The operation of the cycle start (ST) input contact is reversed by parameter STUD (#6007D6).

When the parameter is set to 1, the closing of the contact will start the operation of the control.

3. When the feedhold (*SP) input contact is opened, with the control waiting for the completion of the M, S, T, instruction (waiting for FIN input) feedhold (SPL) output is turned on, but when the M, S, T instruction completion (FIN) input contact is opened, the feedhold (SPL) output is turned off, and the control enters feedhold state.

19.2.2

INPUT AND OUTPUT FOR CONTROL

OPERATION MODES (JOG, H/S, T, MDI, MEM, EDT,

AUT, MAN)

(1) Operation Mode Input

JOG:

H/S:

T:

The following six operation modes of the control are selected by the respective input contacts.

MDI:

MEM:

EDT:

Manual jog mode

Manual handle/manual step feed mode

Tape operation mode

Manual data input operation mode

Memory operation mode

Program editing mode

1

Manual operation

Automatic operation mode

When any the input contacts is closed, the corresponding operation modes is tuned on.

JOG: manual jog mode input

When the JOG input contact is closed, and other mode input contacts are opened, the control enters the manual jog mode, and the machine is jogged in the respective directions in response to the input of +X, -X, +Z and -Z signals.

H/S: Manual handle/manual step feed mode input

When the H/S input contact is closed, and other mode input contacts are opened, the control enters the manual handle mode (when the control is provided with an optional manual pulse generator) or the manual step feed mode, and the machine will be manually fed by the manual pulse generator or fed in steps.

T: Tape operation mode

When the T input contact is closed and other mode input contacts are opened, the control enters the tape operation mode, and the machine will be controlled by the tape commands read by the tape reader.

MDI: Manual data input operation mode input

When the MDI input contact is closed, and other mode input contacts are opened, the control enters the manual data input mode, and part programs will be written or the machine will be operated through MDI.

MEM: Memory operation mode input

When the MEM input contact is closed, and other mode input contacts are opened, the control enters the memory operation mode, and the machine will be controlled by part programs stored in the memory.

EDT: Program edit mode

When the EDT input contact is closed and other operation mode input contacts are open, the control enters the program edit mode, and it can store part programs into the memory, correct and change them.

(2) Operation Mode Output

The control outputs the following signals to inform the current operation mode.

AUT: Automatic operation mode output

This output signal is turned on when the control is in the T (tape operation), MEM (memory operation), or MDI (manual data input operation) mode.

MAN: Manual operation mode output

This output signal is turned on when the control is in the H/S (manual handle/manual step operation mode) or JOG (manual jog mode.)

EDTS: Editing output

This output signal is turned on when the control is in the EDT

(program editing) mode, and also performing and editing operation

(part program reading, collation, punching, and stored program changing and other processing).

are

Timing chart for input and output for control operation modes shown in Fig. 19.2

MEM

(INPUT)

MD!

(INPUT)

JOG

(INPUT)

EDT

(INPUT)

1+

IING-IN

; TAPE

I

I

I

I

I

;>

I I

AUT

(OUTPUT)

MAN

(OUTPUT)

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

(

I

I

I

I

EDTS

(OUTPUT)

--i--i-

Fig. 19.2

Notes :

1. When any operation-mode-input except manual operation mode is given during NC program operation in the moemory operation mode, the control stops the execution of the part program after the execution of the current block.

The same applies to the part program operation in the tape and MDI modes.

2. When a manual-operation-mode-input contact is closed during the execution of a part program in the memory operation mode, the following changes take place.

Motion command

The current motion stops after deceleration, and the program is interrupted.

The remaining program can be restarted when the automatic operation mode is turned on again and the cycle start (ST) input contact is closed.

M, S, T command

The sampling outputs (MF, SF, TF) and the M code outputs are turned off, and the M, S, T command is regarded to have been executed completely.

Even when the control is returned to the automatic operation mode, the interrupted M, S, T command is not resumed.

The above applies to S2-digit commands. S4-digit commands do not have sampling output.

3. When an automatic operation mode or program editing mode input contact is closed during motion in the manual operation mode, the motion decelerates and stops.

4. When any of these operation mode input contacts is closed, that mode becomes effective.

Under other input states, the previous operation mode remains effective. When no operation-mode-inputcontact is closed after the energization, or when two or more operation mode input contacts are closed, the control enters the manual jog mode.

106

19.2.2

INPUT AND OUTPUT FOR CONTROL

OPERATION MODES (JOG, H/S, T, MDI, MEM,

AUT, MAN) (Cent’d)

EDT,

MEM

(INPUT)~

/,NpuT) -

JOG

(INPUT)

I

I

I

1

I

I

OPERATION

MODE OF

;[~:ON-

I I

MEMORY OPER- ‘ TAPE OPER-

ATION MODE ATION MODE

MANUAL

FEED

JOG

Fig. 19.3

5.

When a manual operation mode input contact is closed during the thread-cutting process in a part program, the automatic operation mode is retained while the thread is being cut.

19.2.3

MANUAL RAPID TRAVERSE SELECTION

(RPD) INPUT

When the RPD input contact is closed while the control is in the manual jog mode, manual feeding in the +X, -X, +Z and -Z directions is performed in the rapid traverse rate.

After power supply is input, JOG feed rate can be used as RPD feed rate by parameter (#6009D3= 1) until reference point return for each axis has been executed completely.

19.2.4

MANUAL HANDLE FEED AXIS SELECTION

(HX, HZ) INPUT, AND AUTOMATIC MODE HANDLE

OFFSET (HOFS) INPUT

(1) Manual Handle Feed Axis Selection (HX, HZ) Input

This is the input signal for selecting the motion axis for the motion by the manual pulse generator, with a control provided with a man-ual pulse generator.

When the HX input contact is closed and the HZ input contact is open, the motion takes place along the X-axis.

When the HZ input contact is closed and the

HX input contact is open, the motion takes place along the Zaxis.

Notes :

1. When both the HX and HZ input contacts are closed or open, motion cannot be obtained by the manual pulse generator.

2. When the control is provided with a pulse generator for simultaneous 2axis control, and when a manual step feed is intended, these input contacts are not used.

(2) Automatic Mode Handle Offset (HOFS) Input

This input is for enabling motion control with the manual handle even during the automatic operation mode (Tape mode,

MDI mode, memory mode) with a control provided with a manual pulse gen-erator.

With this input, relative displacements caused by the remounting of the workplaces during automatic operation can be compensated.

When the HOFS input contact is closed, the motion control by the manual pulse generator is effective even during the automatic operation mode.

However, during the exection of a positioning command in the automatic operation mode, machine motion cannot be controlled by the manual pulse generator.

The motion axis for the manual pulse generator motion control is selected by the HX and HZ (manual handle feed axis selection) input contacts.

When the control is provided with a simultaneous

2-axis manual pulse generator, the machine can be moved simultaneously along the two axes.

The travel distance per step of the manual pulse generator is determined by the MP1, MP2 and MP4 (manual handle multiplication factor setting) input.

Notes :

1. In an alarm state (ALM or IER output contact is closed), automatic mode handle offset motion is ineffective.

2. When the interrupt input (STLK) contact is closed, manual handle mode motion is possible, but automatic mode handle offset motion is not possible.

3. When executing automatic mode handle offset motion, parameter

#6022, DOand D, for HOFSX (X-axis motion) and HOFSZ (Z-axis motion) must be set to 1.

4. When parameter HOFSMV (#6022D,) is set to 1, the automatic mode handle offset motion can be applied only to the time during the interpolation in the automatic operation modes.

19.2.5

MANUAL FEED AXIS DIRECTION SELECTION

(+X, -X, +Z, -Z) INPUT

These inputs specify the motion direction when the control is in the manual jog mode or manual step feed mode.

Table 19.1 Motion Direction of Axis o 0

1: Closed, O:Open

0 1

I

Minus direction of Z-axis

Under other input conditions, axis motion is impossible, and current axis motion is stopped after deceleration.

19.2.6

MANUAL HANDLE/STEP MULTIPLICATION

FACTOR (MP1 , MP2, MP4) INPUT

When the control is in the manual handle/manual step feed mode, the motion distance per step is determined by these input signals.

107

108

Table 19.2 Manual Handle/Step Multiplication Factor

MPl \ MP2 I MP4 I ManuatStepFeed I ManualFeedHandle

010101

110101

011101

1 pulse/step

10 pulses/step

100uulses/steu

1 I 1 I O I ltXKlPuls+tep lor O 1

I

1: Closed, O:Open

I 103pulses/step

103putses/step

Note :

Only when manual handle multiplication factor is 100 pulses/step, the control can be used by any multiplication. The multiplication factor should be set parameter #6223.

19.2.7

FEED OVERRIDE/MANUAL JOGGING SPEED

SELECTION (FVI , FV2, FV4, FV8, FV16) INPUT, AND

FEED OVERRIDE CANCEL (OVC) INPUT

(1) These input signals are for specifying override speeds between O and 200% at 10% intervals on the programmed speeds.

In the man-ual jog mode, these inputs determine the manual jog feed rates.

FV1

~ o

1

0

1

0

1

1

1

0

1 o

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

1: Closed, O Open

FV2 FV4 FV8 FV16 4

0000

1

0

0

*

1

001 o

1

1

0

0

1

0010

0010

1

1

0110

0110

1

1

1

1 s

1

1

0

0

1

1

00

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0 1 1

0 1 1

0 1 1

1 01

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Feedrate

Override

(Automatic

Operation

Mode) o%

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

90%

100%

110%

1 20%

1 30%

14(F%

150%

160%

170?’o

180%

190%

200%

0%

Table 19.3

Manual Jog

Feedrate

(Manual Operation Mode)

Setting

#6233

#6234

#6235

#6236

#6237

#6238

#6239

#6240

#624 1

#6242

#6243

#6244

#6245

#6246

#6247

#6248

#6249

#6250

#625 1

#6252

#6253

#6254

#6255

#6256

#6257

#6258

#6259

#6260

#6261

#6262

#6263

#6264

Note : for Table 19.3:

1. When parameter FOVAB (#6020D,) is set to 1, inputs FV1, FV2, FV4,

FV8, and FV16 become effective when the contacts are open, and Oand 1 in the table for the input state and feed override manual jog speeds are reversed.

2. The manual jog feed rates can be used as the feed rates for part program by run execution in the automatic operation modes. For details, refer to

19.2.14 Dry Run (DRN) Input.

3. For the thread-cutting in part program execution in the automatic operation modes, override is possible only at 100’Yo.

(2) Feed Override Cancel (OVC) Input

This is the input for fixing the feedrate override at 100%. When the OVC input contact is closed, the feed rate in part program execution in the automatic operation modes is locked at the programed value, irrespective of the override input conditions.

19.2.8

RAPID FEEDRATE OVERRIDE (ROV1 , ROV2,

ROV4) INPUT

These inputs are for overriding the rapid feed rates, i. e., the positioning speed when executing programs in the automatic operation modes, and the motion speed in the manual jog mode when the RT input cantact is closed.

Table 19.4

Input State

ROV 1 ROV2

1 1

0

1

1

0

X-axis

#6280

Setting speed

#6280

Setting speed x ~

Rapid Feedrate

Z-axis

#6281

Setting speed

#6281

Setting speed x ~

#6280

Setting speed x ~

#628 1

Setting speed x ~

FO(#6231 Setting speed) o 0

1: Closed, O:Open

Rapid feedrate override is changed from 4 steps to 6 steps by parameter #60 18 D2= 1.

Table 19.5

Input State

ROV1 I ROV2 I ROV4 I

1 0 1 o

1 o

1 o

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

X-axis

Rapid Feedrate

I

Z-axis

100%

50%

25%

1 o%

100%

50%

25%

1 o%

5% 5%

I FO(#6231 Setting speed)

1: Closed, O Open

19.2.9

REFERENCE POINT RETURN CONTROL l/O

SIGNALS (ZNR, xDCX, xDCZ)

These are input and output signals for bringing the machine to the machine reference point upon the enegization of the control.

(1) Grid Method

Reference point is determined by the origin pulse

(lpulse/revolu-tion) of the position detector.

After turning on the power supply, when themanual jogmodeis turned on, and the manual reference point return input contact ZRN is closed , the direction of axis motion set by parameter ZRNDRX,

ZRNDRZ (#6010 DO, Dl) will result in the reference point return motion as shown below.

(The same applies to the execution of G28 intheautomatic operation modes.)

SPEED

I

RAPID TRAVERSE RATE

(#6280, #6281)

APPROACH SPEED 1

/ (#6310, #6311)

/

TRAVERSE DISTANCE

I

I

1 II

I

I

Y

SPEED SEQUENCE

DECEL LS SIGNAL

(*DCX, *DCZ)

~.-.

ZERO POINT PULSE

Fig 19.4

When the machine is returned to the reference point once, the return motion, thereafter will be in the positioning motion to the determined reference point.

SPEED

I

RAPID TRAVERSE

(#6280, #6281)

(2) X and Z Reference Points (ZPX, ZPZ) Output

While themachine isremaining atthe reference point after the reference point return motion or positioning to the reference point, the ZPXand ZPZoutput contacts are closed.

Ifthe actual position is not within +3 pulses from the reference point due to the use of metric input in the inch output system orvice versa, the ZPX and ZPZ output contacts are not closed.

(3) 2nd Reference Point (2ZPX, 2ZPZ) Output

When the machine has beed positioned to the 2nd reference point by the execution of the part program command G30 in the automatic operation mode, the 2ZPX, and 2ZPZ output relays are closed, andremain closed as long as the machine remains at this point.

The 2nd reference point is defined by the distance from the reference point as set byparameters XZP2L, ZZP2L

(#6612, #6613).

19.2.10

MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON/OFF (ABS)lNPUT

During the execution of part programs in the automatic operation mode, the control stores the command values in an internal commandvalue register (command values aredisplayed on the lst CRT area), and the displacement distance between the stored value and the coordinate value in the part program.

Since thecontrol must also control the current position, it controls the current values in the absolute coordinate system (to be displayed inthe2nd CRT area.

Thecoordionate system is defined by a coordinate system setting command.)

This input is for determing whether the current value in the absolute coordinate system is transferred to the command value register or not at the start of the execution of the respective bloks of part programs in the automatic mode.

. When ABS input relay is open: Does not transfer.

. When ABS input relay is closed: To be transfemed, except when circular interpolation is used.

The motion path after a manual control intervention in the automatic operation mode is changed as follows by an ABS input.

Y

Fig. 19.5 Reference Point

Return Motion after First Power ON

SPEED

SEQUENCE

However, when parameters MZRNHS, AZRNHS (#6010 D4, D5) are set to 1, the same reference point return motion is obtained also for the 2nd time onward.

(1) When ABS Input Relay is Open

The motion path after an intervention by manual axial motion, is the one shifted parallel from the original path by the distance cov-ered by the manual motion.

GO1 Z20.000

X20.000

FAA;

Z30.000

Xlo.000

Z40.000

—0

X20.000

Z30.000

Xlo.000

z 20.000

Fig. 19.6

x 10.000

z 40.000

@ When the machine is manually moved during a block.

(3) Supplementary Description

In the following cases, the control transfers current value in the absolute coordinate system (coordinate system displayed in the

CRT current value 2nd area, or the one determined by coordinate system setting instructions) to the command value register unconditionally.

. RESET operation: MDI panel RESET key-on or external reset

(ERS) input contact closed

. End of program: Program reset through end of program (EOP) input contact closing by M02, M30 execution

. Automatic return to reference poin~ Execution of G28 command

After transfeming the current value in the absolute coordinate system to the command value register, manual axial movement even when the ABS input contact is closed.

When the block @ is searched again by the RESET operation after axial motions by manual operation, the following motion takes place.

X20.000

z 30.000

x 20.000

— Axis motion by manual operation

Fig. 19.7

(2) When ABS Input Relay is Closed.

x 20.000

z 30.000

x

10.000

z 20.000

— x 10.000

z

40.000

Axis motion by manual operation

Fig. 19.8

A x 10.000

z 20.000

x 10.000

z 40.000

_ Axis motion by manual operation

Fig. 18,9

19.2.11

SINGLE BLOCK (SBK) INPUT

This input is for executing part programs one block at a time in the automatic operation mode.

With the control in the automatic operation mode, and the SBK input contact closed, when an automatic operation cycle is started, only one block of the part program is executed, and the machine stops.

When the SBK input contact is closed during the execution of a part program, the control stops the machine after the execution of the current block.

For details of the use of single block during the execution of multiple cycles, user-macro programs, refer to “YASNAC J50L

Instruction Manual (TOE-C843-12.20).”

110

19.2.12

OPTIONAL BLOCK DELETE (BDT, BDT2-

BDT9) INPUT

This input is for determining whether data between”/” and “EOB” in a part program is executed or neglected when the part program contains” /.”

Table 19.6

Neglected Data between

“/” or “/1” and “EOB”

(End of block)

“,.2,,and ‘<~o~>,

BDT INPUT CLOSED

BDT 2 INPUT CLOSED

BDT 3 INPUT CLOSED

BDT 4 INPUT CLOSED

BDT 5 INPUT CLOSED

BDT 6 INPUT CLOSED

BDT 7 INPUT CLOSED

BDT 8 INPUT CLOSED

BDT 9 INPUT CLOSED

4’/3”and “EOB”

“/4” and “EOB”

“/5” and “EOB”

“/6” and

“EOB”

,’fl>,and “EOB>>

“/8” and “EOB”

“/9” and

“EOB”

Notes :

1. Data can be neglected only when part programs are executed.

When storing or processing part programs, this input has no effect.

2. Whether data may be neglected or not depends on the state of the optional block delete input relay when the block containing “ /“ in a part program is stored in the buffer. Therefore, when controlhngthe optional block delete input relay by an external circuit with the use of the auxiliary function, take care to set the input state before the block containing “/’’i sstroredi nthebuffer.

19.2.13

MACHINE LOCK (MLK)AND DISPLAY LOCK

(DLK) INPUT

(1) Machine Lock (MLK) Input

This is the input for preventing the outputting of control output pulses to the servo unit. While the MLK input contact is closed, even when the logic circuit distributes pulses in the automatic and manual operation modes, the machine does not move.

As the logic circuits distribute pulses, the current value display changes with the instructions.

If the MLK contact is closed or opened during the automatic operation of the control, the operation is not influenced until the start of the next block, and during manual operation, until the end of the current motion,

(2) Display Lock (DLK) Input

This input is for preventing the output pulses of the control from being displayed on the external current value display.

While the

DLK input contact is closed, even when the machine is controlled automatically or manually, the external current value display (DRT.

POS 1st display area “EXTERNAL,” and external 2-axes current value display) does not change,

19.2.14

DRY RUN (DRN) INPUT

This input is for changing the feedrates of the tools during the execution of part programs in the automatic mode to the rates selected by the manual continuous feed selection inputs (FV1, 2, 4, 8 and

16).

While the DRN input contact is closed, the feedrates during the execution of part programs in the automatic mode are changed from the programmed ones to the ones selected by the manual continuous feed selection inputs.

While the DRN input contact is closed, the feedrates in part program execution in the automatic mode are the ones specified by the manual continuous feed selection input signals, instead of the programmed one. (However, for thread cutting, programmed feedrates remain effective.)

When the DRN input contact is closed or opened during the automatic operation of the control, the following change takes palce.

During mm/rev feeding: No change of feedrate for the current block.

During mm/min feeding: Feedrate changes even during the current block.

Notes :

1. When parameter RPDDRN (#6006 D2) is set to 1, while the DRN input contact is closed, the feedrate in positioning command is changed to a manual continuous feedrate.

2. When parameter SCRDRN (#6019 D5) is set to 1, while the DRN input contact is closed, the feedrate is changed to a manual continuous feedrate.

19.2.15

CURRENT VALUE STORING (PST) INPUT

This input is for storing current values in the control.

When the PST input contact is closed, the control stores current values (CRT screen POS display 1st area EXTERNAL) into the internal memory, and the LED incorporated in the OFS key in the

MDI FUNCTION area flickers.

Then, it performs the following calculation on the offsets written by

MDI, and stores the result in the offset memory.

Values to be

El

Resetting operation

‘E-a

(depressing RESET key on MDI panel, or closing external reset input contact) cancels the current value storing mode and stops the flickering of the LED.

111

For the details of the usage of the PST input, refer to 5.2.3 Measured Workpiece Value Direct Input in YASNAC J50L Instruction

Manual (TOE-C843- 12.20).

19.2.16

PROGRAM RESTART (PRST) INPUT

This input is used when a part program is to be started again after interruption.

Close the PRST input contact, turn of the memory mode, and search the sequence No. of program restart by the NC operator’s panel.

The M, S, T codes present between the leading end of the program and the searched sequence No. are displayed on the CRT.

For the details of the usage of the PST input, refer to “5.2.6

Program Restart” in YASNAC J50L Instruction Manual (TOE-

C843-12.20).

19.2.17

EDIT LOCK (lNHEDT)

This is the input for preventing the change of the contents of the stored part program.

While the INHEDT input contact is closed, the following operations, among the ones in the program edit mode, are prohibited.

. Storing part programs by the MEM DATA “IN” key

. The change, addition or deletion of part programs in the memory with the EDIT “ALT,” “INS” and “ERS” keys.

19.2.18

AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK (AFL) INPUT

This is the input for omitting the M, S, T function in executing part program in the automatic operation mode.

While the AFL input contact is closed, the control disregards M,

S, T instructions of programs when executing part programs.

However, M code decoded outputs (MOOR, MOIR, M02R, M30R) are outputted.

When the AFL input contact is closed or opened during the execution of part programs, the change become effective from the block subsequent to the current block.

NOTE

With S4-digit instructions analog outputs are output in accordance with the instructions, even while the AFL input contact is closed.

19.2.20

INTERRUPTION

INPUT

POINT RETURN (CPRN)

This is the input for positioning the machine at the interruption point by manual jogging after the control was switched over from the automatic operation mode to the manual operation mode, and subsequently moved away under manual control.

While the CPRN input contact is closed, manual jogging motion stops after arrving at the interruption point. When the machine is at the interruption point, manual jogging is impossible unless the

CPRN input contact is opened.

19.2.21

OVERTRAVEL (*+ LX, *-LX, *+LZ, *-LZ)

INPUTS

These input signals are for signifying the arrival of the machine slides at their respective stroke ends.

When there overtravel input contacts are opend, the machine slides stop motion, as shown in

Table 19.7, and close the alarm (ALM) output contact and, at the same time, display alarm on the CRT.

Table 19.7

~

Input Opened

A+LZ

Inp~t Opened

* -LZ

Input Opened

I

-X direction

Motion stoD in

+Zdirection

Motion stop in

-Z direction

Motion stop of all axes

When an overtravel input contact is opened, move the machine in the reverse direction in the manual operation mode (manual jogging or manual pulse generator) to close the contact, and then make the alarm output and display.

NOTE

Even when the overtravel input contacts are opened, the M code reading output (MF, S code reading output SF, and the T code reading output TF are not turned off. If the motion by M codes, S codes of T codes must be stopped by overtraveling inputs, interlock the motion with external sequence.

19.2.19

SETUP POINT RETURN (SRN) INPUT

This is the input for positioning the machine at the setup point by manual jogging.

While the SRN input contact is closed, manual jog motion stops as the machine arrives at the setup point. When the machine is at the setup point, manual jogging is impossible unless the SRN input contact is opened.

112

19.2.22

MACHINE-READY (MRD) INPUT

This input informs that the external heavy-current circuit is ready.

When MRD input is closed after closing of Servo Power Input/

Output (SVMX) from the power-on/off unit of the control after the power is turned on, the control is ready and “RDY” is displayed on the CRT screen.

When MRD input is opened with the control being ready, the control is put in the alarm state alarm code “280” is displayed), thereby stopping the operation.

For the turning of power sequence, refer to” 10 CONNECTION

OF INPUT SEQUENCE”

19.2.23

EMERGENCY STOP ON (xESPS) OUTPUT

When Emergency-Stop Input (X TESP) is opend, *ESPS output is opend.

19.2.24

EXTERNAL RESET (ERS) INPUT AND RESET

ON (RST1 ,2) OUTPUT

ERS is the input to reset the control.

When ERS input is closed, the control stops all of its operations, closing Reset On outputs RST1 and RST2 for one second. The output signals are opened except for the following,

Table 19.8

Output at ERS Input Closed Output Signals

AUT/IvfAN

ZPXIZPZ

2zPx/2zPz

*ESPS

PO1-2 sol-2

RST

Previous conditions kept.

Output contact is closed for one second while

ERST input contact is closed or is opened.

Contactor kept closed unless alarm causing factor is removed.

ALM

S11-S28

T1 I-T28

DS 1-2

SINVA

RO 1-2

SDOO-15

TLCH1-2

Uoo- 15

Previous conditions kept.

Contact closed if any of selected, group of tools reaches end of life.

Previous conditions keut.

Note :

When ERS input is closed, the control is put in the label skip state.

However, memory is rewound, while the tape is not.

19.2.25

INTERLOCK (STLK) INPUT

This input stops the spindle travel in the atuomatic operation mode.

When “STLK” input is closed during the spindle travel in the automatic operation mode, only the spindle travel is stopped with the automatic operation being activated (“STL’> output is in the closed state).

When “STLK” input is opened again, the spindle travel is resumed.

“STLK’ input does not affect the M, S, and T comannds in both manual and automatic operation modes.

19.2.26

AMARM (ALM) AND INPUT ERROR (IER)

OUTPUTS AND EXTERNAL ERROR DETECT

(ERRO,l) INPUTS

(1) Akirrn (ALM) and Input Error (IER) Outputs

These outputs inform that the control is in the alarm state.

IER: This output is closed on detection of an alarm caused by the information from the part program or the input device.

(Alarm codes “010” through “129.”)

ALM: This output is closed on detection of any alarm other than the avobe.

(However, the alarm for the fault of the logic circuitry in the control is not inchrded.)

These outputs are opened again when the cause of the detected alarm has been removed and RESET operation is performed.

(2) External Error Detect (ERRO, ERR I) Inputs

These inputs put the control in the alarm state from the outside.

ERRO: When this input is closed, the control displays alarm code “180” and is put in the alarm state.

If this input is closed during the execution of the part program in the automatic operation mode, the execution is stopped on completion of the block being executed.

ERR1: When this input is closed, the control dkplays alarm code

“400” and is put in the alarm state. If this input is closed during the extention of the part program in the automatic operation mode, the tool travel is immediately slowed down and stopped.

19.2.27

RAPID THREADING PULL-OUT (CDZ)

INPUT AND ERROR DETECT-ON (SMZ) INPUT

(1) Rapid Threading Pull-out (CDZ) Input

This input determines whether rapid threading pull-out is performed or not in the exection of G92 (thread cutting cycle) or

G76 (composite thread cutting cycle).

When CDZ input is closed, the rapid threading pull-out is performed; when this input is open, it is not performed.

The control determines by the CDZ input whether rapid threading pull-out is performed or not at the start of a thread cutting cycle.

To open/close CDZ input by such a command as M, add the delay time of the input circuit processing and set the state of CDZ input to the start of thread cutting cycle.

113

(2) Error Detect ON (SMZ) Input

This input determines whether “Error Detect On” condition is added to the end conditions for the feed in the automatic operation mode.

Error Detect On:

Due to the servo system delay, during traveling, the position detected by the position detector follows, the position designated by the logic circuit with a delay. When the designated position and the detected position are found under the values set in parameters

XPSET and ZPSET (#6056 and#6057), it is called in the “Error

Detect On” state.

When SMZ input is closed, “Error Detect On” condition is added to the feed end conditions in the automatic operation mode.

When this input is open, this condition is not added.

SNZ input does not affect any positioning commands.

(With each positioning command except G06 (Error Detect Off Positioning),

“Error Detect On” condition is added to the end conditions.)

19.2.28

X-AXIS MIRROR IMAGE (MIX) INPUT

This input inverts the X-axis traveling direction in the automatic operation mode.

When an automatic activation is performed with

MIX input closed, the X-axis traveling direction by the part program is made opposite to the specified direction.

When MIX input is closed then opened during the execution of the part program, it is made valid for the commands after the satisfaction of the following two conditions:

(1) Compensation cancelled.

(2) Out of automatic operation.

MIX input does not affect the X-axis travel in the manual operation mode.

19.2.29

M, S, AND T CODES (Ml 1 THROUGH M38,

S11 THROUGH S28, T11 THROUGH T28, MF, SF,

TF, FIN) lNPUTS/OUTPUTS

(1) M, S, and T Codes Output and M, S, and T Code Reading outputs

Table 19.9

M code output

S code output

Mll, M12, M14, MIS, M21, M22, M24, M28,

M31, M32, M34, M38

I S11, S12, S14, S18, S21, S22, S24, S28

T code outuut I T1l. T12. T14. T18. T21. T22. T24, T28

M code reading output MF

S code reading output SF

T code reading output TF

These are outputs for the M, S, and T commands specified by the part program at its execution in the automatic operation mode.

If any of M, S, and T commands is found at the execution of the part program in the automatic operation mode, the control outputs it in a

BCD code according to the value that follows the detected command (M=2 digits/3 digits, S=2 digits, T=2 digits).

Then, after the elapse of the time set in parameter MSTF

(#6220), the M, S, and T code reading outputs are closed.

NOTE

1.

With the S4 digit command, analog output is provided,

2.

disabling the S code output and the S-code read output.

M commands (M90 through M109) for logic circuit processing: With the T commands (T 00AA through T80 AA, T90 AA, T•090

, T51 AA through T ❑ ID95, and T ❑ O 99), the M/T code output and the M/T code reading output are not provided.

(2) M Decode (MOOR, MOIR, M02R, and,, M30R) Output

When any of M commands “MOO,” “MO1 ,“ “M02,” and “M30” is executed, the corresponding decoded output “MOOR,”

“MOIR,” “M02R,” or “M30R’ is outputted in addition to the M code output and the M code reading output.

NOTE

When an M command for decoded output and a move command are specified in the same block, the M code output is provided at the start of the block, while the decoded output is provided after completion of the move command.

(3) M, S, and T Functions Completion (FIN) Inputs

These inputs give the completion of M, S, and T commands to the control.

When FIN input is closed while the M, S, and T code reading (MF, SF, and TF) outputs are closed, they are opened.

If FIN input is opend again after making sure of their opening, the control assumes that the M, S, or T command has been completed, starting the operation of the next step.

NOTE

1. For the S4-digit command, FIN input need not be closed.

2. When FIN input is closed then opened, the M code output and the

M decoded output are all opened, but the S code and T code outputs remain without change.

114

19.2.29

M, S, AND T CODES (Ml 1 THROUGH M38,

S11 THROUGH S28, Tll THROUGH T28, MF, SF,

TF, FIN) lNPUTS/OUTPUTS (Cent’d)

(4)

Time Chart of M, S, and T Signals

M

coMMAND<

“FIN”

E-

INPUT

If

If

I

I

S/T CODE ~

OUTPUT

SIT CODE

SIT

COMMAND ;:$?;;

“FIN

INPUT

\\!

I

J

!

t !

I

,

~

PARAMETER #6220

“MSTF” SETTING

TIME

TO NEXT

STEP i

I

//

/

----

TO NEXT

STEP

S-4 DIGIT

COMMAND s CODE J

OUTPUT s CODE

READING

~

OUTPUT

\

!

L20Cms~’

TO NEXT

STEP

Note : Parameter #6011, D6=1

Fig. 19.10

If a move command and an M, S, or T command are specified in the same block, the move operation and the M, S, or T operation are executed simultaneously.

READ-IN

SIGNAL

“FIN” INPUT ~

Fig. 19.11

19.2.30

POSITIONING COMPLETION (DEN 1,2)

OUTPUTS

These outputs inform the completion of a move command when an

M, S, or T command and the move command have been specified in the same block at the execution of a part program in the automatic operation mode.

Tho block in whish an M, S, or T GOtIHtMItd and a move command are specified at the same time is executed if the M, S, or

T command is not completed at the termination of the move command, positioning completion outputs DEN1 and DEN2 are closed.

When FIN input is closed then opened and the M, S, or T command is completed, the positioning completion outputs are opened.

19.2.31

TRAVEL ON (OPI ,2) AND THREAD CUTTING

ON (THC 1,2) OUTPUTS

(1) Travel ON (OP1, 2) Outputs

With these outputs, the control informs that the tool is traveling during the execution of a part program in the automatic operation mode.

These outputs are closed in any of the following situations:

. During the execution of a move comand.

. In the state in which a move command is discontinued by the interrupt (STLK) input or the FEEDHOLD (*SP) input.

(2) Thread Cutting ON (THC1, 2) Outputs

With these outputs, the control informs that thread cutting is being performed during the execution of part program in the automatic operation mode.

These outputs are closed during thread cutting.

19.2.32

END-OF-PROGRAM

(RWD) INPUT AND

(EOP) INPUT, REWIND

REWIND ON (RWDS1,2)

OUTPUTS

(1) End-of-Program (EOP) and Rewind (RWD) Inputs

With these outputs, the controller determines what processing is to be performed at completion of an M02 or M30 command.

The control performs the following processing, depending on the state of EOP and RWD inputs, when completion input FIN for an M02R or M30R commands is opened and then closed:

In general, EOP input is connected to M02R output and RWD input, to M30R output.

Table 19.10

EOP I RWD I

,

1

1 o

Function

1

The control is at standby after rewinding part programs and resetting programs.

(l The control is at standby after resetting programs.

1

The control is at standby after rewinding part momams.

O I O I The control is at standby’

1: Closed, O Open

Notes :

1, Program reset provides the same effects as with depressing of

RESET key on MDI panel (ERS) input. In the program reset, however, the NC memory rewind operation is not perfomed. For details of the rc.set

operation by closin~ ERS input, refer to 19,2.24

“EXTERNAL RESET (ERS) INPUT AND RESET ON (RST 1, 2)

OUTPUT.”

2.

When a program reset operation is perfomed, Reset On output RST is closed for one second.

115

(2) Rewind ON (REWDS 1, 2) Outputs

With these outputs, the control informs that the part program is being rewound.

If the part program is rewound by RWD input for an M02 or M30 command, RWDS 1 and RWDS2 are closed during the rewinding operation.

NOTE

To use these outputs, set parameter RWDOUT (#6007 D4) to”1 .“

Otherwise, they are not provided.

19.2.33

DISPLAY RESET (DRSX, DRSZ) INPUTS

These inputs set the external 2-axis acurrent value display and the current value display on the operator’s panel CRT to “O.” When

“DRSX’ (X-axis display reset) or “DRSZ” (Z-axis display reset) is closed, “O” is set to the external 2-axis current value display and the current value display on the operator’s panel CRT (the first screen

“EXTERNAL”).

19.2.34

EXTERNAL STORE , MATCH, AND OUTPUT

(EIN, EVER, EOUT) INPUTS

These inputs are used to perform store, match, and output operations on the NC memory of the control from outside.

If these inputs are closed when the control is in the program edit mode and Edit Output On (EDTS) output is closed, the following operations take place:

EIN input is closed:

The part program is stored in the NC memory.

EVER input is closed:

The part program is matched against the NC memory.

EOUT is closed:

The contents of the NC memory are outputted.

While a store, match, or output operation is performed, the In-

Edit (EDTS) output is closed.

NOTE

The 1/0 equipment for the store and match operations depends on setting IDVCEO, 1 and ODVCEO, 1 (#6003).

19.2.35

S4-DIGIT COMMANDS (DAS, SGS1 , GR1

THROUGH GR4, S! NV, AND SINVA) INPUTW

OUTPUTS

These signals are used to determine the speed of the spindle motor when the control is in the state of S Command 4-Digit Analog output.

GR1 through GR4 are used to enter into the control state of the gear range between the spindle and the spindle motor to determine the spindle motor speed by the spindle speed specified in the part program.

SINV input inverts the polarity of the analog output at the time of S Command 4-Digit Analog output.

While the polarity is inverted, SINVA signal is outputted.

(1) S4-digit Command Analog (GAS, SGS1) Output

Analog voltage (- 10V to OV to + 10V) is outputted as follows by the spindle motor speed command and GR1 through GR4:

—.— ; The output when “GR1” input is closed. (Set the spindle motor maximum speed at gear range “GR 1” to parameter

GRIREV: #627 1.)

—-; The output when “GR2” input is closed. (Set the spindle motor maximum speed at gear range “GR2” to parameter

GR2REV: #6272.)

—--; The output when “GR3” input is closed.

(Set the spindle motor maximum speed at gear range “GR3” to parameter

GR3REV: #6273.)

----; The output when “GR4” input is closed.

(Set the spindle motor maximum speed at gear range “GR4° to parameter

GR4REV: #6274.)

SPINDLE MOTOR

SPEED COMMAND OUTPUT

—“— :OUTPUT WITH “GRI “ INPUT CLOSE

‘“”— :OUTPUT WITH “GR2 INPUT CLOSE

—,,.— :OUTPUT WITH “GR3” INPUT CLOSE

–....– :OUTPUT WITH “GR4 INPUT CLOSE

Fig. 19.12

19.2.35

S4-DIGT COMMANDS (DAS, SGS1 , GR1

THROUGH GR4, SINV, AND SINVA) lNPUTS/

OUTPUTS (Cent’d)

(2)

Time Chart of Analog Voltage Output, SINV Input, and SINVA

Output for Spindle Motor Speed

ANALOG

VOLTAGE

OUTPUT

SINV INPUT

SINVA OUTPUT

~t

1

I

II

A

100 ms

MAX

Fig. 19.13

1

(3) Spindle Maximum/Nfinimum Speed Clamp

The spindle maximum/minimum speed at each gear raoge may be set using the following parameters:

Table 19.11

Parameter Function

MACGRI

(#6266)

Spindle maximum speed when “GR1”

I inuut is closed.

MACGR2

(#6267)

MACGR3

(#6268)

Spindle maximum speed when “GR2” input is closed.

Spindle maximum speed when “GR3” input is closed.

MACGR4

(#6269)

MACGR1

(#6276)

Spindle maximum speed when “GR4” input is closed.

Spindle maximum speed when “GRI” inrmt is closed.

MACGR2 I Spindle minimum speed when “GR2” \

Iv

No. in Fig below

,,

VI vu m

I

“

Spindle minimum speed when “GR3”

Spindle minimum speed when “GR4”

~

The following diagram shows an example of the S4-digit analog outputs when the spindle maximurn/minimum speeds are clamped by these parameters:

SPINDLE MOTOR

SPEEO OUTPUT

+1OV

I

OUTPUT

FOR

SINV

INPUT

Ov

~W&PUT

SINV

INPUT

I

–1OV

Fig. 19.14

Notes:

1. The .

)indle motor sueed command outnut is obtained from the following relation:

(Spindle speed command) x (1OV)

(Spindle gear range spindle maximum speed determined by GR1 through GR4 inputs: parameters #6271 through #6274)

2. With the spindle motor speed command analog output, the polarity may be inverted by processing M03 (spindle forward rotation) or

M04 (spindle reverse rotation) within the control by using parameter SDASGN1 or SDASGN2 (#6006 D6 or D7).

Table 19.12

SDASGNI SDASGN2

(#6006 D,) (#6006 D,)

0

1 o

1

0

0

1

1

M03 output

+

+

M04 output

+

+

When SINV input is closed, the above polarities are inverted.

3. When spindle S Command Stop (SSTP) input is closed, a value other than those described earlier may be outputted for the spindle motor speed command.

For details, refer to “SPINDLE S

COMMAND STOP (SSTP) INPUT,”

4. When two or more of GR1 through GR4 inputs are closed or not closed, the control determines the gear ranges as follows:

Table 19.13

GR1 input GR2 input GR3 input GR4 input Gear Range

o 0 0 0

1 1

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

1

0

1

1

1

0

0

0

Gear range 1

0 I

Gear rarwe2

0

Gear range 1

1

0

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

I

Gearrange2

Gesr range 1

O:Input, 1: Input closed

117

Supplementary Explanation

Constant surface speed control and S4-digit command output:

When constant surface speed control (G96) is specified by the part program at its execution in the automatic operation mode, the output is varied evry 100 ms according to the following relation during a cutting operation:

(Surface speed by S command)

(X-axis current vlaue) x (r’c) x

(1OV)

(Spindle gear range max. speed determined by GR1 to GR4 inputs

Time Chart Example

S OUT-

,“,

1

I -#

1!

r-l ----

!

~––––––+––~

CUTTING

EXECUTING

POSITIONING POSl-

COMMAND

NO. 1 NO. 2

CUTTING

TIONING EXECUTION

Fig. 19.15

Setting parameter POSG96 (#6020 DO) to” 1“ enables the control to perform the constant surface speed control also on the posi-tioning command.

(However, only the spindle speed obtained by the coordinate value of the positioning end point is outputted.)

19.2.36

SPINDLE S COMMAND “O” (SSTP), GEAR

SHIFT ON (GRS) INPUT, AND SPINDLE CONSTANT

SPEED (GSC) INPUT

These inputs are used to make the S4-digit command analog output provide the outputs other than the part program S command.

When

SSTP input is closed, the spindle motor speed command output based on the spindle speed specified in the part program is stopped.

If GRS input is closed in this state, the voltage to set to parameter GRSREV (#6270) is outputted.

If GSC input is closed, the spindle motor speed command voltage is outputted which corresponds to the spindle speed to be set to parameter GSCREV (#6275) by the spindle gear range input.

Table 19.14

SSTP

Input o

GRS

Input

0

0 o o

110101

0

1

1

1

1

111111

0

1

GSC I

Input

0

1

0

1

S4-digit Command

Analog Voltage

Voltage corresponding to spindle speed commanded by NC program.

1

0

Ov

Voltage corresponding to parameter GSCREV.

ParameterGRSREVsettingvalue.

Ov

O:Contact open, 1: Contact closed

Notes :

1. It is possible to make the analog outputs for SSTP, GRS, and GSC inputs negative by the S4-digit analog output invert (SINV) input.

2. The period of time between the setting of SSTP, GRS, or GSC input and the catching-up of the analog voltage value is shorter than 100 ms.

3. Setting parameter SSTPAB (#6020 D,) to 1 enable the control to provide “XSSTP” input.

19.2.37

SPINDLE SPEED REACHED (SAGR) INPUT

This input is used to inform, in the case of the S4-digit command, that the spindle speed has reached the specified value at the start of cutting at the execution of the part program in the automatic operation mode.

At the start of cutting (when switching from a positioning command to a cutting command takes place), the control delays the time by the value specified in parameter SAGRT

(#6224), makes sure that SAGR input is closed, and starts cutting.

NOTE

1. To perform the above operation by SAGR input, set parameter SAGRCH

(#6006 D4) to “1.“ If it is set to “O,”SAGR input is ignored.

2. In G96 mode, SAGR input is checked every time the switching from a positioning command to a cutting command takes place. In G97 mode,

SAGR input is checked at the switching only when the spindle speed is different between the positioning start and end times.

19.2.38

SPINDLE SPEED OVERRIDE (SPA, SPB,

SPC, SPD AND SPE) INPUTS

These inputs are used, in the case of the S4-digit command, to override the S command in a range of 50% to 120% at the execution of the part program in the automatic operation mode.

118

19.2.38

SPINDLE SPEED OVERRIDE (SPA, SPB,

SPC, SPD ANS SPE) INPUTS (Cent’d)

SPA

Input

1 o

0

SPB

Input

1

1

1

11101 o o

1

1

1

1: Closed, O:Open

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

Table 19.15

SPC

Input

1

1

0

I

I

Override to S Command

50%

6090

70%

80%

90%

100%

110%

120%

Override is specified to S command within 10% to 200% range by parameter #6018 D 1.

Table 19.16

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

SPA SPB o

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

[nput

SPC o

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

1: Closed, O:Open

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

I

1

0

0

1

1

0

SPD ~ SPE

7

1

1

1

0

-6-

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

Override to S Command

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80’%

90%

100%

110%

1 20%

130%

140%

150%

160%

170%

180%

190%

20070

19.2.39

S4-DIGIT COMMAND EXTERNAL OUTPUTS

(SDOO THROUGH SDO15) AND S4-DIGIT EXTER-

NAL INPUTS (SD1O THROUGH SD115)

These inputs and outputs are used, when the control is of S command 4-digit, to output the results of the operation by the S command in the part program to the outside and perform the actual S4digit command analog output according to the inputs from the outside.

(1) S4-digit Command Analog Output

Output of operation results to outside:

SDOO through SD015

. Inputs from outside to output analog voltage to DAS and SGS1:

SDIO through SD115

Note :

The input/output value is a signed binary 16-bit, The relationship with analog voltages is as follows: -32767 to O to +32768, -1OV to o to +1OV

NOTE

The primary purpose of this function is to control the S4-digit command by the sequencer built in the control.

This function should not be used for other purposes unless especially required.

19.2.40

EXTERNAL WORK NUMBER SEARCH A

(WN1 , WN2, WN4, WN8, AND WN16) INPUTS

This is a function to select the program by the program number specified by external input from the part programs stored in the part program memory of the equipment.

(1) To use this external work number search A, assign the program number as follows:

000

AA

- Work Number (01 to 31)

The work number search timing is as follows (provided that the external input (WN 1 to WN 16) is not “00”): a. At reset operation.

(When RESET key is depressed, or the external reset input or EOP input is turned ON.) b. When CYCLE START key is depressed in the memory mode and the label skip ON status.

(2) The relationship between external inputs WN1 through WN16 and program numbers is as shown in Table 19.17.

Program No.

0001

0002

0003

0004

0005

0006

0007

0008

0009

0010

0011

0012

0013

0014

0015

0016

0017

0018

0019

0020

0021

0022

0023

0024

0025

0026

0027

0028

0029

0030

0031

Table 19.17

WN 1

1

0

1

0

WN2

0

1

1

0

Input Status

WN4

0

0

0

1

WN8

0

0

0

0

I

11

10

11

10

11

10

1 o

1

0

1

1

1010101110

I 1

10

1

0

10 10

I

1

10

1 0

0 1

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1 1

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

I 1 10

I

1

10

1 0

1 0

1

1

0

0

11 I 1 I 1 lo

10

10

10

10

I 1 10

10

10

10

I 1

I ~

I 1

0 1 1

0

0

I 1 I

1

10 10

0

1

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

10 I 1

I

1

I 1

1 1

1

1

1

1

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

WN16

0

0

0

0

1: Closed, O: Open

Notes:

1.WN1 through WN16 inputs are disregarded at the start of a part program in other than memory and running modes. The start of a part program is when an automatic run is activated in the label skip state (“LSK is being displayed on the CRT screen).

2. The program number selection by a reset operation is perfomed independently of the running mode.

3. When WN1 turough WN 16 inputs are all open, the program number selection is not performed.

4. If the part program memory of the control contains two or more part programs which have part program numbers 01 through 31 specified by WN1 through WN16, the program stored nearest the memory being is selected.

5. The program number for which this search function is vaild are

00001 through 000031.

6. If the specified program number is not found after a search operation, error” 134” is caused.

7. When this work number search A function is performed,

FUNCTIONisautomatically changedtoPROG.

19.2.41

TIME COUNT (EXTC)INPUT (OPTIONAL)

This input makes the control count the time.

The control accumulates the time in which EXTC input is closed and displays the result in the bottom of “OPERATION TIME DISPLAY,” which is on page 3of<’ALM’ function ontheoperator’s station CRT.

(Operating time display “EXTERNAL’’i soptional.) Thetime display is reset by pressing “4” key then ~ key by the MDI.

Until this reset operation is performed, the time display is retained after such an operation as power-on.

19.2.42

SPINDLE INDEXING FUNCTION (SID1-SID

12) lNPUT/OUTPUT

This input/output is used to perform the spindle indexing function which stops the spindle at the desired position by controlling the

S4-digit analog output by the pulse from the spindle pulse generator.

(1) Input Signals

. SID 1 through SID 12:

Binary 12-bit (O to 4095) input signals to specify the spindle stop position.

Each signal corresponds to the pulse (4096 pulses/rev) from the spindle pulse generator.

Usually, the stop position corresponds to the number of pulses entered by SID 1 to SID 12 from C-phase pulse (1 pulse/ rev) of the spindle pulse generaor.

Note: Use of parameter SIDREF (#6342) enables the control to shift the stop position by the number of pulses set from C-phase pulse to this parameter.

. SIDX:

The input signal to request the control for a spindle indexing operation.

If this input is closed while the spindle is rotating, the speed command to perform indexing is output and the spindle indexing operation is started.

After the completion of the indexing operation, the spindle speed command analog output remains a spindle positioning command unless this input is turned off.

Thereby making the control continue the indexing operation.

~SIDXI and SIDXINC:

SIDXI (spindle indexing restart input) and SIDXINC (spindle stop position designate incremental input) are the inputs for the repetitive spindle indexing sequence.

For details, refer to (6),

“Spindle Indexing Extention Function Input.”

(2) Output Signals

. SIDXO:

This output goes on when the control is performing a spindle indexing operation (during the output of creep speed command or spindle positioning command).

19.2.42

SPINDLE INDEXING FUNCTION

SIDI 2) lNPUT/OUTPUT

(Cent’d)

(SIDl-

. SIDXA:

This signal indicates the completion of a spindle indexing operation.

It is on while the spindle position is in the range between the position set in parameter SPSET (#6058) and the position designated by SID1 to SID12.

(3)

SPINDLE INDEX TIME CHART

Spindle index by M-code at spindle stop (Spindle positioning is released after spindle index is completed.) See Fig. 19.16.

. Spindle index by m code at spindle forward operation (Spindle positioning is continued until next spindle speed command after spindle index is completed.) See Fig. 19.17.

SPINDLE lNDEX~

M CODE

SPINDLE INDEX

POSITION INPUT

(SIDI-SID 12)

SPINDEL INDEX

REQUEST INPUT

(SIDX)

SPINDLE INDEXING

OUTPUT (SIDXO)

SPINDLE INDEXING

COMPLETION

OUTPUT (SIDXA)

M, S, T FUNCTION

COMPLETION

INPUT (FIN)

SPINDLE

ROTATION

SIGNAL

SPINDLE

SPEED

:~w:: o

\~

\l

\

\

1

1’

!

SPINDLE INDEX

START SPEED

CREEP SPEED

COMMAND

t

SPINDLE INDEXING

Fig, 19.16

1

1

—

SPINDLE INDEXING

M CODE

SPINDLE INDEXING

POSITION

(SID1-SID 2)

INPUT

SPINDLE INDEXING

REQUEST INPUT (SIDX)

SPINDLE INDEXING

OUTPUT (SIDXO)

SPINDLE INDEXING

COMPLETE OUTPUT(SIDXA)

M, S, T FUNCTION

COMPLETE INPUT (FIN)

+

<

II

,

I

I

1 1

1

,1

\ _

M COOE FOR

SPINDLE SPEED~

COMMAND

I

/

I

SPINDLE

POSITIONING

1

1+/ j

4 y&k’

Fig. 19.17

121

(4) Parameters for Spindle Indexing and Detailed Spindle Indexing

Table 19.18

No.

#6058

(SPSET)

#6064

(BSS)

#6076

(SSVER)

#6085

(SIDSER)

#6342

(SIDREF)

#6343

(SIDRV1)

#6344

(SIDCRP)

#6227

(KPS)

Detailed Function of

Spindle Indexing

Pulse width of index completion output signal.

Setting

1=1 pulse

Bits setting for output saturation

Refer to parameter table.

Servo alarm area setting for spindle Refer to drive parameter table.

Timer setting to confirm the spindle stop

Spindle index reference point setting

1=8 ms

1=1 pulse

I

Spindle index speed command

I

1=500pps

Spindle index creep speed command

1

I

1=500 pps

Set 1024.

Position loop gain

Note :1 pulse= 0.088°

(

360°

4096 pulses

)

S COMMAND

SPINDLE

SPEED

COMMAND

1+: SPINCILE SPEED

(SIDX)

I

1

I

SPEED (#6343)

INDEX START k-

INDEX START

&~lW~EST

-r--&--

I

11

\

‘<.

OUTPUT r

(Sloxo) _ _-

INDEX

POSITION

INPUT

+1

I I

TIMER SETTING

TO CONFIRM

THE SPINDLE

STOP

1

:S1/KELE PG

Uwmrmsm mNM

SPINDLE PG

ORIGIN PULSE

L~

INDEX POSITION DESIG-

NATION (SIDI-SID12)

Fig.

19.18

Detailed Spindle Indexing

(5) Display of Spindle Indexing Function

When the control contains the spindle indexing option, the following display is made under heading SPINDLE COUNTER on page 8 of the POSITION display on CRT screen:

. During a spindle indexing operation (SIDXO output is on), the number of pulses from the spindle pulse generator is displayed.

[

SPINDLE COUNTER 01234 N1234

PULSE COUNTER FOR SPINDLE INDEX

PULSE

12345

I

. When a spindle indexing operation is not performed (SIDXO output is off), the spindle speed (obtained by converting the number of pulses from the spindle pulse generator) is displayed.

I

SPINDLE COUNTER

SPINDLE SPEED

12345

01234 N1234

RPM.

\

122

19.2.42

SPINDLE INDEXING

SID12) lNPUT/OUTPUT (Cent’d)

FUNCTION (SIDl

(6)

Spindle Indexing Extension Function Input

The control provides the following two inputs to process various spindle indexing sequence made available by application of the spindle idexing function described previously.

. SIDXI:

Spindle indexing restart input.

If this inputs is closed with Spindle

Indexing On (SIDXO) output on, the control stops the spindle indexing operation and turns the SIDXO output off.

While the indexing operation is discontinued, the spindle speed command analog output becomes the spindle indexing start speed command.

When this input is turned off in this state, the control restarts the spindle indexing operation.

-

. SIDXING:

Spindle indexing position incremental input. This input is used to designate an incremental position of the spindle indexing position input (SID 1 to SID 12) from its previously designated position.

The use of this input enables the control to rotate the spindle from the current indexing position to the next indexing position without a full rotation.

However, this input is invaild when the spindle indexing operation is first made after rotating the spindle in non-indexing operation or when the spindle indexing operation is first made after the power-on operation.

. Example of Spindle Indexing Time Chart using Spindle Indexing

Extension Input:

(i) Restart the spindle index if spindle index is not completed, the specified time after spindle indexing (Fig. 19. 19).

SPINDLE

M CODE lNDEXl~

SPINDLE

POSITION

(SID1-slD12) lNDEXIN~

INPUT

SPINDLE INDEXING

REQuEST INPUT

(SIDX)

SPINDLE INDEXING

OUTPUT (SIDXO)

SPINDLE INDEXING

COMPLETION

OUTpuT (SIDXA)

SPINDLE

RESTART

(SIDXI)

INDEXING

INPUT

\

\ t

I

4y~;~L:~)DExING

ANALOG OUTPUT o

!

1

SPINDLE

INDEX

SPEED

COMMAND

TIMER (EXT

SEQUENCE INS) +

:~fiEfi;;:ED

Fig. 19.19

‘?

\

I

I

123

(ii) Spindle indexing at A position 180° from the indexed position after spindle indexing and mechanical clamp and machining.

See Fig. 19.20.

M CODE FOR

SPINDLE

INDEX AND

MECHANICAL

CLAMP

SPINDLE INDEXING

M CODE FOR MECHANICAL

(SpINDLE INDEX 18tY) AND

UNCLAMP

CLAMP

Ef’DxaL

SPINDLE INDEXING

COMPLETION OUTPUT

(siDxA)

M, FUNCTION

C,OMPLETE SIGNAL(FIN)

SPINDLE ROTATION slGNAL (ExTERNAL

SEQUENCE PROCESSING) splNDLEMEcHANlcAL

CLAMP SIGNAL

~;;~~tNN&EQuENcE

~

SPINDLE MECHANICAL

CLAMPCHECKSIGNAL g;J:~:$~g;QuENcE

SPINDLE

COMMAND . .

VOLTAGE

II

)

I

1

!

. .

J1’1.

SPINDLE CREEP SPEED

COMMAND INDEX

SPEED

COMMAND

( 1

SECONDARY PROCESS-

INGWITHOUTSPINDLE

ROTATION

I

CREEP

SPEED

II

Notes :

1. The spindle indexing function is available only when the control has the S command 4-digit analog output specification.

The polarity of S 4-digit analog output should be externally determined by SINV input.

2. To make a spindle index from the spindle reverse rotating status, keep SINV input on while the spindle indexing request input

(SIDX) is ON.

3.When an incremental spindle indexing operation isperfonnedby turning SIDXING input on with SINV input being on, the

Fig. 19.20

4. A spindle indexing operation is not performed during interpolation pulse output.

5. Accumulated values of pulses by incremental command should be

10 pulses or less.

6. Spindle index is performed at the edge of C-phase pulse (1 pulse/rev) as a reference pulse. When C-phase pulse includes a pulse width as shown below, a spindle index position between the spindle forward and reverse rotating states is shifted by C-phase pulse width.

A-, B-PHASE

PULSES

C-PHASEPULSE

REFERENCE

PULSE OF

FORWARD

DIRECTION

REFERENCE

:~~::gF

DIRECTION

~

I I 1 I I 1 I 1 I I 1

I I

I

1

19.2.43

STORED STROKE LIMIT3 BY TOOL (TP1,

TP2, TP4, TP8, TPS, TPSA) lNPUTS/OUTPUTS

(l) Using the following input/output signals, this function sets a maximum of 15 types of stored stroke limit 3 as classified by tool. This is bytheuse of the external input:

.

Tool number input —TP1, TP2, TP4, and TP8

.

Area change input —TPS

.

Area change complete output —TPSA

Fig. 19.21

19.2.43

STORED STROKE LIMIT 3 BY TOOL (TP1 ,

TP2, TP4, TP8, TPS, TPSA) lNPUTS/OUTPUTS

(Cent’d)

(2)

At the power-ON, reset operation, or closing TPS input, the control selects the stored stroke limit area as follows according to TP input:

TP1

1 o

1 o

1 o o

1

0

1

1 o

1 o

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

Input Status

TP2 TP4

0 0

1 0

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

Table 19.19

TP8

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Parameter No.

Setting Area

#6508-#6511

#6512-#6515

#65 16-#6519

#6520-#6523

#6224-#6527

#6528-#6531

#6532-#6535

#6536-#6539

#6540-#6543

#6544-#6547

#6548-#6551

#6552-#6555

#6556-#6559

#6560-#6563

#6564-#6567

1: Closed, O: Open

(3) When the TPS input is closed, the control performs the area change, upon completion of which area change outputs TPSA1 and TPSA2 are closed.

TPS

INPUT

J\

\

TPSA

OUTPUT

I I

Fig. 19.22

If the TPS input is turned ON during the spindle shift in the auto or manual mode, the area change processing is not performed.

19.2.44

MACRO RROGRAM (UIO-U115, UOO-U015) lNPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION

are used as system variables in macro These inputs/outputs programs:

%Els

#1001 I UI 1

Table 19.20

System

Variables I

?+1100

Input

I Uoo

#llol I Uol

*

#1 105 I U05

#loo7

#1008

I

I

U17

U18

*

*

*

#lo15 I UI 15

#llo9

#lllo

#1111

#1112

#1113

#1114

#1115

I

I Uo 9

I Uolo

Uoll

Uo 12

Uo 13

Uo 14

Uo 15

19.2.45

EXTERNAL DATA INPUT (ED O THROUGH

ED15, EDSA THROUGH EDSD, EDSA O THROUGH

EDSA2, EDCL, EREND, ESEND) lNPUTS/OUTPUTS

(1) These inputs/outputs are used to make the machine perform the following functions by external inputs.

a. External work number search C

Search for a 4-digit program number.

b. External tool compensation C

Modification of a 4-digit tool offset.

c. External work coordinate system shift.

There are following input signals:

. Data input – EDO through ED15

. Data designation — EDSA through EDSD

. Axis designation — EDASO through EDAS2

. Data request input — EDCL

The details of these input signals areas shown in Table 19.21.

126

Table 19.21

External Work

No. Search

External Tool

Compensation C

Signal Name

ED O

ED 1

ED 2

Program No.

===11

ED 3

ED 4

ED 6

1

No. of 10-digit

ED 5 ==11

ED 7

ED 8

1

1 Compensation amount

No. of l-digit

(BCD code)

I

No.

of 10-digit

i?i!h ~

!HwkT

(EDSA-EDSD)

~

\

IEDCL)

INPUT

COMPLE-

TIONOUTPUT tERENO

\,

No. of 1000-digit

‘(o to 7)

*tNOOflOOO-digit

ED 15 J

EDSA

EDSB

EDSC

EDSD

EDAS O

1

EDAS 1

EDAS 2

EDCL

[

I

I

1: Closed, O:Open

1 o o o

Sign O plus,

1: minus n

1

Oorl

Oorl

Oorl

0

Axis designation

O:x. l:Z n

O:Incremental

1: Absolute

Data read in request

There are following output signals:

~External data input complete — EREND

External data search complete — ESEND

(2) External Work Number Search C

This function searches for the part program of a 4-digit program number designated by the input signal EDO to ED15. The timing of signal transfer is as follows:

. EDCL input is detected by the 8 ms scan.

. When EDCL goes ON, EREND is output within 8 ms, starting the search for the part program of the designated program number.

. If the desired program has been found, ESEND is output for more than 200 ms.

However, this signal is not output when the Reset

ON output is ON.

It is output only when this output is turned

OFF.

.

If the desired program has not been found, error “134” is caused and ESEND is not outputted.

Note

This external work number search function is valid only in the memory mode and the label skip state. In any other conditions, EDCL input is invaild.

(3) External Tool Compensation C

This function adds or replaces the tool offset (O to t7.999

mm or O to f 0.7999 in.) designated by input EDO to ED15 to or with the currently designated tool offset memory value.

When

EDAS2 is “O,” addition is made; when it is “1/’ replacement is made. The timing of signal transfer is as shown in Fig. 19.24.

ED O-

ED15

EDSA-

EDSD

EDCL

TOOL

OFFSET

VALUE

EREND

\{

Jd-

I

-_H_

Fig. 19.24

.

EDCL input is detected by the 8 ms scan.

. The tool offset number to be rewritten is the currently designated tool offset number.

At the time of single block stop, the contents of the tool offset number of the terminated block are rewritten.

(4) External Work Coordinate System Shift

When the currently designated tool offset number is “00” in the external tool compensation C, this function adds or replaces the value (O to ~ 7.999 mm or O to +0.7999 in.) designated by input

EDO to ED15 to or with the work coordinate system memory value.

When EDAS2 is “O, “ addition is made; when it is “ 1, “ replacement is made.

The timing of signal transfer is the same as with the external tool compensation C.

WHEN

SEARCH

NOTPERFORMED

:F&FI ~

Fig. 19.23

19.2.45

EXTERNAL DATA INPUT (EDO THROUGH

ED15, EDSA THROUGH EDSD, EDSA, O THROUGH

EDSA2, EDCL, EREND, ESEND) lNPUTS/OUTPUTS

Generally, the external tool compensation C and external work coordinate system shift functions must be activated by specifying a given M code in an appropriate location on the part program and turning on the data request input EDCL by that M code.

19.2.46

TOOL LIFE CONTROL (TLA1 THROUGH

TLA16, TLTM, TLSKP, TLRST, TLCH1 AND TLCH2) lNPUTS/OUTPUTS

The tool life control function enters the following into the control: the information on tool life (how long a tool is serviceable or how many workplaces a tool can cut), the tool numbers of tool groups of the same type and the compensation numbers to be used.

This makes it possible, by simply specifying the T code for tool life control in the part program, for the control to control that T code according to the machining time and the number of workplaces entered.

Described here are only the signals associated with this function.

For the program and other information, refer to “YASNAC J50L

Instruction Manual (TOE-C843- 12.20).”

This function uses the following inputs/outputs:

~Tool replacement completion tool group number inputs —TLAI 1,

TLA12, TLA 14, TLA18, and TLA21.

. Tool skip input — TLSKP

. Tool replacement request outputs — TLCH 1 and TLCH2

It is also needed to make a registration of the following information through the program tape or CNC operator’s panel MDI operation:

Table 19.22

Registration of Tool Groups

Setting Number

#8601 to

#8650

Registration

Tool group number of tool number

“01.” Setting 1 to 19.

I to

Tool group number of tool number

“50.” Setting 1 to 19.

Table 19.23

Registration of Tool Life

Setting Number

#6161 to

#6169

#6 170

#6t~79

I

Registration

Life of tool group “01 .“ to

Life of tool group “09.”

Machining count setting: l=once.

Life of tool group” 10.” to

Life of tool group “ 19.”

Machining count setting: l=lmin

In addtion, there are settings for registering compensation numbers and other information.

Since they have no relation to the input/output, the explanation is omitted.

(1) Tool Replacement Complete Tool Group Number Inputs

(TLA1, TLA2, TLA4, TLA8, AND TLA16) and Tool

Replacement Complete Input (TLRST)

These inputs inform the control of the completion of tool replacement after the replacement of the tools of the group number whose life has terminated.

Set the tool group number of tool replacement complete to

TLAI, TLA2, TLA4, TLA8, and TLA16 according to Table 19.24, and close TLRST input.

When the replacement of the tools of the group number whose life has terminated is all completed, tool replacement request outputs TLCH 1 and TLCH2 are opened.

Table 19.24

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1 o

0

1

0

0

1

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

1

0

Input

TLA 1 TLA2 TLA4 TLA8 ‘rL41fl

1

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

1 0 1 0 0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

0

0

1

Tool Change Completion

Group No.

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

04

05

06

01

02

03

1: Closed, O:Open

(2) Tool Skip Input (TLSKP)

This input is used to replace registered tools before their lives terminate.

When TLSKP input is closed in the automatic feedhold state

(STL and SPL outputs are open), the processing that the service life of the currently used tool has terminated is performed within the controller.

Then the new tool is specified by the following T command.

127

(3) Tool Replacement Request Outputs (TLCH)

When a program end or reset operation is performed after the ter-mination of the service lives of all registered tools belonging to a tool group number, TLCH is closed.

When these outputs are closed, make sure of the tool group number which is being displayed on the CRT screen and replace the tools.

Note

When TLCH is closed, the automatic activation in the automatic operation mode is disabled.

19.2.47

SKIP INPUT

If SKIP input is closed during the execution of move command by

G31 in the automatic operation mode, the control immediately stops the movement and stores the coordinate value where SKIP input changed from open to close.

At this point, the block of G31 command is regarded to have been completed, and the following block is taken up.

The coordinate value of the skip position is stored in the following setting numbers:

#6568 --- X-axis coordinate value

#6569 --- Z-axis coordinate value

Note

1. The block of G31 command moves in the same way as

GO1. If parameter SKPFED (#60 19 D4) is set to “ 1, “ the feed rate which is not specified in the part program but is set to parameter G3 lF (#6232) is provided.

2. If SKIP input is not closed after the completion of the block of G31 command, the following operation takes place:

, When setting SKIPIN (#6004 DO) is set to “ 1,“ the following block is executed.

. When setting SKIPIN (#6004 DO) is set to “O,” the alarm state (alarm code “087”) is generated.

19.2.48

OVERRIDE

COMBINED

(COVI,

COV16) INPUTS

FIXED

COV2,

CYCLE

COV4,

CUTTING

COV8, AND

These inputs are used to override the cut depth of the stock removal cycle specified by G71 and G72.

According to the state of these inputs, an override is applied to the cut depth specified in “D.”

Table 19.25

Covl o

Input

COV2 ‘COV4 COV8 COV16

0 0 0 0

Override

(%)

0

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

0

1: Closed, O:Open

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

0 0

0

1

0

1

1

1

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

80

90

100

50

60

70

110

120

130

140

190

200

19.2.49

SERVO POWER ON (SONPB) INPUT

(1) If this input is closed when NC power is on (NCMX is ON), servo power turns on by power-on operation.

(2) This input is equivalent to turning on servo power by the power

ON pushbutton.

(3) This input is effective if parameter #6030 D,=l.

If this parameter is selected, the power ON pushbutton cannot turn on servo power.

19.2.50

HIGH-SPEED REWIND AND START (RWDH)

INPUT

(1) NC Performs high-speed rewinding by closing this input and by returning a completion signal (FIN) during execution of M30.

(2) Automatic start is possible by selecting a parameter (#6023

DO=l) when rewinding is completed.

(3) This input is effective in the MEM mode.

(4) Disregard the RWD, EOP input when this input is used.

POwER ON

PUSHBUTTON

NCMX

OUTPUT

SONPB

INPUT

SVMX

OUTPUT

~

\

\

Fig. 19.25

100ms

OR

MORE

\,

M30 OUTPUT~

MF OUTPUT

FIN INPUT

STL

I

I I

1,

1,

ii

1

Itll

/\\ r

~’+

I

I

I

I

I

I i

1

I

I

I

I w

[ tl, t2>100ms

Fig. 19.26

20. J50M STANDARD 1/0 SIGNALS

20.1 LIST OF NC STANDARD 1/0 SIGNALS

Standard input/output signals are listed below.

For custom-built signals depending on the system, refer to the list of 1/0 signals provided for that particuhw system.

Input

Signals (PLC+NC)

#1 300

1

D7

EDT

EDIT

De

MEM

MEMORY

D5

MDI

MANUAL

DATA

INPUT

#1301 Ovc

OVERRIDE

CANCEL

ROV2 ROV1

~’

RAPID TRAVERSE

RATE OVERRIDE

D4

T

TAPE

OV16

#1 302 –a +a

-z

DISPLAY

D7 D6

0000111

T

Contact open

D5

D3 s

STEP

+Z

-Y

MANUAL FEED

D2

H

HANDLE

+Y

D4 D3 D2

T

Contact closed

D1

DI

J

MANUAL

FEED

DO

RT

RAPID

TRAVERSE

OV8 OV4

Y

FEEDRATE OVERRIDE

OV2

-x

Ovl

+x

DO

1

#1 303 SPC SPB

SPINDLE SPEED

OVERRIDE

SPA JV16

#1 304 DRS

DISPLAY

RESET

.

MP4 MP2 MP1

HANDLE PULSE MULTIPLY

JV8 JV4 JV2

MANUAL FEEDRATE OVERRIDE

Ha HZ HY

HANDLE AXIS

JV1

)

HX

,

#1 305 AFL

M-

FUNCTION

LOCK

MLK

MACHINE

LOCK

#1 306 SRN

PROGRAM

RESTART

F1

F1 -

DIGIT

OPT

OPTIONAL

STOP

RET

RETRACT

DRN

DRY

RUN

TLMI

TLMIN

BDT

BLOCK

DELETE

DLK

DISPLAY

LOCK

ZRN

ZERO

RETURN

EDTLK

EDIT

LOCK

*SP

FEED

HOLD

SBK

SINGLE

BLOCK

ST

CYCLE

START

#1 307 PINT

PROGRAM lNTER-

RUPTION

ZNG

Z-AXIS

LOCK

ABS

MANUAL

ABSOLUTE

Mlct MIZ MIY

MIRROR IMAGE

MIX

#1 308 I

9BDT I 8BDT I 7BDT I 6BDT I 5BDT I 4BDT I 3BDT I 2BD

SPECIAL BLOCK DELETE

I

#1 309 ZRN2

2ND

ZERO

RETURN

* Normally closed contacts

4NG

4TH

AXIS

NEGLECT

EWS

EXTERNAL

WRITE

PST

TOUCH

SENSOR

WSH

#1310

D7 Dij D5 D4 D3 D2 DI DCI

#1311

#1312 PLYBK TCNT

PLAYBACK TOOL

CUT

COUNT

INEFFECTIVE

SENSON

TOUCH

SENSOR

EFFECTIVE

TLCTN TLSKP

TOOL LIFE CONTROL

TLRST ESC 1 ESC O

I

EXT STROKE

CHECK SELECTION

=

#1313 RWDH

HIGH-SPEED

REWIND &

AUTOSTART

FSCH

FEED/

SPINDLE

CHANGE

#1314

~

SPE

SPINDLE

OVERRIDE

SPD

FSMEM

FEEDI

SPINDLE

MEMORY

FSCM

FEEDI

SPINDLE

EDIT

MODE

ROV 4

RAPID

TRAVERSE

SLPC

SPINDLE

LOOP

COMMAND

INPUT

ECLM

EXT

PROGRAM

CLEAR

#1315

#1316

MANINT SSM

MACHING SENSOR

INTERRUPT STOP

POINT MODE

RETURN

FFIN FIN

COMMAND

CYCLE

MST

COMPLE-

TION

PPR

MACHINING

INTERRUPT

POINT

RETURN MODE

RWD

EXTERNAL

REWIND

NTCRQ

TOOL

CHANGE

REQUEST

EOP ERS

END EXTERNAL

PROGRAM RESET

TCFIN

TOOL

CHANGE

COMpLETED

EXTC

EXTERNAL

TIME

COUNT

STLK

CYCLE

START

#1317 S-INV

SPINDLE

REVERSE

S-FIN

S-CODE

COMPLETION

SAGR

SPINDLE

COINCl-

DENCE

SOR

SPINDLE

INDEXING

~

GRB .

GRA

GEAR

SELECTION

#1318 ERR 2

DECTO

STOP

ERR 1

IMMEDIATE

STOP

ERR O

SINGLE

BLOCK

STOP

SENS (G)

GAP

ELIMINATE

SENS (T)

TOOL

BROKEN

EXOUT

EXTERNAL

OUTPUT

EXVER

MRD

FUNCTION

PREP

COMPLETED

GST

GEAR

SHIFT

EXIN

EXTERNAL EXTERNAL

COLLATION INPUT

#1319

*

-La *+La * -LZ *+LY e -LX x+LX x+LZ e -LY

OVERTRAVEL

#1 320

L

HOFS

AUTO MODE

HANDLE

OFFSET

* Normally closed contacts

* ITa x ITZ *WY

AXIS INTERLOCK

* ITX

131

20.1

LIST OF NC STNDARD 1/0 SIGNALS (Cent’d)

Input Signals (PLC-+NC)

#1 321

D7

* -EDcx

D6

X+EDCX

D5

* -EDz

D4 x+EDZ

D3

* -EDY

EXTERNAL DECELERATION

D2 x+EDY

#1 322

#1 323

SONPB

SERVO

POWER

ON

UI 7 UI 6 UI 5 x SVOFct

UI 4 UI 3

MACRO PROGRAM x SVOFZ

SERVO OFF

UI 2

DI

* -EDX x SVOFY

UI 1

DO x+EDX

SVOFX

UI o

#1 324 UI 15 UI 14 UI 13 UI 12 LHll

MACRO PROGRAM u! 10 UI 9 UI 8

#1 325 ED 7

#l 326 ED15

ED 6

ED14

ED 5 ED 4 ED 3

EXTERNAL DATA INPUT

ED 2

ED 13 ED12 ED1l

EXTERNAL DATA INPUT

ED 10

ED 1

ED 9

ED O

ED 8

#1 327 EDCL EDAS 2 EDAS 1 EDAS O EDSD EDSC

EXTERNAL DATA INPUT CONTROL SIGNAL

EDSB EDSA

#1 328 EDAS 3

EXTERNAL

~Cl~~DINATE

#1 329 I

ABS/lNC

I TL64

xDECct xDECZ

DECELERATION LS xDECY

I TL32 I TL16 I TL8 ] TL4 I

TOOL LIFE CONTROL TOOL GROUP NO. INPUT

TL2 xDECX

I TL1 I

#1 330

#1331 SDI 8 SDI 7 SDI 6 SDI 5 SDI 4 SDI 3

S 5-DIGIT COMMAND EXTERNAL INPUT

SDI 2 SDI 1

1

* Normally closed contacts

132

#1 332

D7

SDI 16

Dtj

SDI 15

D5

SDI 14

D4

SDI 13

D3

SDI 12

D2

SDI 11

S 5-DIGIT COMMAND EXTERNAL INPUT

#1 335 FSCLS WSKAN 1

#1 338

FS EDIT MANUAL

DATA CLEAR SKIP COMPLETED

WN 128 WN 64 WN 32 WN16 WN 8 WN 4

#1341 SID 8 SID 7

EXTERNAL WORK NO. SEARCH INPUT

SID 6 SID 5 SID 4 SID 3

DI

SDI 10

WN 2

DO

SDI 9

WN 1

SID 2 SID 1

#1 342

#1 343

Output Signals (NC-+PLC)

#1 200 ]

#1201

#1 202

D7

M30 I M02 I

D5

MOI I

SPINDLE INDEX POSITION

SID 12

D4

MOO

2 ZPX

SID 11 SID 10 SID 9

I

SPCUT

SPINDLE

INDEX

STOP

D3

DEN

POSITION-

ING COM-

PLETED

1 ZP(X

SPINDLE INDEX POSITION

SIDXI SIDXINC

SPINDLE

INDEX

RESTART

SPINDLE

INDEX

POSITION

INC

I OIJ

FEEDING

1 ZPZ

I

DI

SPL

TEMPO-

RARY

STOP

1 ZPY

I

SIDX

SPINDLE

INDEX

REQUEST

Do

STL

CYCLE

START

1 ZPX

I

2 zPcx 2 ZPZ 2 ZPY

4 zPa

SECOND REFERENCE POINT LAMP

4 ZPZ 4 ZPY 4 ZPX 3 ZPa

FIRST REFERENCE POINT LAMP

3 ZPZ 3 ZPY 3 ZPX

‘FOURTH REFERENCE POINT LAMP THIRD REFERENCE POINT LAMP

#1 203

#1 204

#1 205

#1 206

#1 207

#1 208

L

WSFTER WSFTK

WORK

COORDINATE

DISPLAY SET

TLCHA

TOOL

CHANGE

TLCHB

NEW TOOL

SELECTION

TCF

TOOL

CHANGE

READ

SIDXA

SPINDLE

INDEX

COMPLETION

OUTPUT

TCHGF

TOOL

CHANGE

1 GROUP

COMPLETED

SIDXO

SPINDLE

INDEXING

OUTPUT

PRDO

RAPID

TRAVERSE

OUTPUT

SLPS

SPINDLE

GROUP

STATUS

OUTPUT

I

SINVA

SPINDLE

REVERSE

OUTPUT

G 93M

1

G 93

MODE

OUTPUT

133

20.1 LIST OF NC STNDARD 1/0 SIGNALS

(Cent’d)

Output Signals (NC+PLC)

D7

#1 209 MANINTK

MACHING

INTERRUPT

POINT RETURN

COMPLETRD

#1210

D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 DI DO

FSCLRK FSCE FSMD

FS DATA FS MEMORY FS MEMORY

CLEAR CHANGED EDIT MODE

#1211

#1212

MIMGMa MIMGMZ MIMGMY

MIRROR IMAGE MODE

MIMGMX

#1213

1

#1214

#1215 G84S

G741G84

EXECUTING

#1216

~

T8/T28 T71T24 T61T22 T5/T21 T41TI 8

T FUNCTION BINARY/BCD OUTPUT

T31T14 T2/Tl 2 T1/Tll

#1217

[

T16/T48 T15JT44 T14iT42 T131T41 T12/T38 T11 IT34

T FUNCTION BINARY/BCD OUTPUT

TI O/T32 T91T31

#1218 TAP

TAPPING

M04S TLMO

SPINDLE TOOL”

REVERSING LENGTH

MEASURE-

MENT

G80S

CANNED

CYCLE

EREND

EXTERNAL

DATA

INPUT

COMPLET-

ED

ESEND

EXTERNAL

DATA

INPUT

COMPLET-

ED

RST

RESET

AL

ALARM

D7

#1219 SRV

SPINDLE

REVERSE

D6

SSP

SPINDLE

STOP

FOR CANNED CYCLE

D5

FMF

MF

#1 220

D4

EF

EXTERNAL

D3

BF

B-

FUNCTION

D2

TF

T-

FUNCTION

DI

SF s-

FUNCTION

DO

MF

M-

FUNCTION

#1 221

#1 222 Ma M7 M6 M5 M4

M-FUNCTION BINARY/BCD OUTPUT

M3 M2 Ml

#1 223 0s

ORIENTA-

TION

EDTS

EDITING

IER

INPUT

ERROR

4 NGC

4TH

AXIS

NEGLECT

AUTO

AUTO-

MATIC

MAN

MANUAL

RDY

PREPARA-

TION

COMPLETED

RWDS

REWIND

#1224 SDA61SB8

#1 225 SDA 16

SDA 7/SB 7 SDA &LSB6 SDA wsB 5 SDA 4/SB 4 SDA 3/SB 3 SDA 2/SB 2 SDA l/SB 1

SDA 15 SDA 14

S 5-DIGIT ANALOG OUTPUT/ s 4-DIGIT 12-BIT

NON-CONTACT OUTPUT

SDA 13 SDA 121SB 12 SDA llISB 11 SDA 10ISB 10 SDA 9/SB 9

S 5-DIGIT ANALOG OUTFWT/ s 4-DIGIT 12-BIT

NON-CONTACT OUTPUT

#1 230

J

#1 231

#1 232

[

B 8/B 28 B 71B 24 B 61B 22 B 51B 21 B4/B18 B31B14

B FUNCTION BINARY/BCD OUTPUT

B2/B12 B1/Bll

#1 233 B 161B 48 B 151B 44 B 141B 42 B 131B 41 B 121B 38 BIIIB34

B FUNCTION BINARY/BCD OUTPUT

#1 234 S 28 S 24 s 22 s 21 S18

S FUNCTION ‘BCD OUTPUT

S14

B 10/B 32 B 91B 31 s 12/GRH

HIGH-

SPEED

GEAR

S 1 l/GRL

LOW-

SPEED

GEAR

20.1

LIST OF NC STNDARD 1/0 SIGNALS

Output Signals (NC+NC)

(Cent’d)

#1 235

D7

S 48

D6 s 44

D5

S 42

D4 s 41

D3

S 38

S FUNCTION BCD OUTPUT

D2 s 34

#1 236

1

U7 U6 U5 U4 U3

MACRO PROGRAM

U2

#1 237

[

u 15 u 14 u 13 U12 Ull

MACRO PROGRAM u 10

#1 238

[

DI

S 32

UI

U9

DO s 31

Uo

U8

#~ 239

#l 277

[

1HP7 1HP6 1HP5 1HP4 1HP3

HANDLE PULSES

1HP2 lHP1

#1 278

[

1 HP o l} MONITOR

#1279

[

#1 280

#1 281 o

#1 282

1

JSD BALM

JSD

0: NOT

BATTERY

ALARM

PROVIDED MONITOR

1: PROVIDED

#1 283

SKIP SN4 SN3 SN2

SYSTEM NO’. SWITCH

SNI

1

0

ON-PB

POWER

ON

SWITCH

OLD

OVERLOAD

SVALM

SERVO

ALARM

STOP

ESP

EMER-

GENCY

OHT

OVERHEAT

1 EXAXIS

SNS 4

PAGE O 0 EXCMOS

CONSTANT OPTION AXIS’

1 13QARD

MONITOR

CONTACT SIGNAL MONITOR

FOR MAINTENANCE

0: SR 51 BOARD PROVIDED 1: SR 51 BOARD NOT PROVIDED

SNS 3 SNS 2 SNS 1

SYSTEM NO. SETTING

#1 284

#1 285

#1 286

#1 287

#1 288

#1 289

#1 290

D7

SVON

SERVO

POWER

ON

0

0

TGONX

TGONY

TGONZ

#1291 TGON 4

Df5

NRD

NC

READY

D5 D4 D3

*AL4

D2

*OL4

DI

FU 4 SRD 4

SERVO UNIT MONITOR FOR 4TH AXIS

DO

0

0

0

0

Pcx PBX PAX

PG MONITOR FOR X-AXIS

PCY PBY PAY

Y

PG MONITOR FOR Y-AXIS

Pcz PBZ PAZ

PG MONITOR FOR Z-AXIS

0 0

CONSTANTS “l”

0 0

CONSTANTS “O

0

0

0

0

1

0

* ALX

Pcs PBS PAS

PG MONITOR FOR SPINDLE x OLX FUX SRDX

* ALY

SERVO UNIT MONITOR FOR X-AXIS e OLY FUY SRDY

* ALZ

SERVO UNIT MONITOR FOR Y-AXIS

* OLZ FUZ SRDZ

SERVO UNIT MONITOR FOR Z-AXIS

Pc 4 PB 4 PA 4

PG MONITOR FOR 4TH AXIS

I

#1 292

#1 293

#1 294

I

AFLC

AUX

FUNCTION

LOCK

#1 295

MLKC

MACHINE

LOCK

OPTC

OPTIONAL

STOP

EFFECTIVE

PLBKC

PLAY-

BACK

ZNGC

Z-AXIS

NEGLECT

DRNC

DRY RUN

ABSC

MANUAL

ABSOLUTE

BTDC

OPTIONAL

BLOCK

SKIP

EFFECTIVE

MlaC

EDTLKC

EDIT

LOCK

DLKC

DISPLAY

LOCK

MIZC

STLKC

START

LOCK

MIYC

MIRROR IMAGE AXIS

SBKC

SINGLE

BLOCK

MIXC

SETTING

MONITOR

#1 296

#1 297 ALM 28 ALM 24 ALM 22 ALM 21 ALM 18 ALM 14

ALARM CODE MONITOR (LOWER 2-DIGIT BCD CODE)

ALM 12 ALM 11

#1 298

.

ALM 38 ALM 34 ALM 32

ALARM CODE MONITOR

ALM 31

20.2

DETAILS OF SIGNALS

20.2.1

INPUT SIGNALS FOR CYCLE START (ST)

AND STOP (*SP) OUTPUT SIGNALS FOR CYCLE

START (STL)

AND FEEDHOLD(SPL)

(1) With the control in any of the TAPE, MEMORY, and MDI modes, when the input contact ST is closed and opened, the control starts automatic operation control to execute the part program, and at the same time, turn on the STL output signal for cycle start.

However, an ST input is neglected under the following condition.

(a) While the control is in an alarm state.

( While an alarm output or an input error output is on. )

(b) While the feedhold *SP input contact is open.

(c) While the external reset ERS input contact is closed.

(d) While the RESET button on the MDI & CRT panel is being pushed.

(e) While the system No. switch is in any state except for O and 4.

(2) When the following state is entered after cycle start, the control completes operation control, and turns off the STL output.

(a) When a part program has been executed by manual data input in the MDI mode.

(b) When one block of a part program has been executed with the single block (SBK) input contact closed.

(c) When the program end (EOP) input contact has been closed by an M command of a part program.

(3) When the feedhold input contact “* SP” is opened during automatic operation, the automatically controlled motions, etc. are inter-rupted, and at the same time the cycle start output STL is turned off and the feedhold output SPL is turned on.

While a block of thread cutting instruction is being executed, the feedhold input is neglected.

(4) When the feedhold input contact *SP is closed, and cycle start input contact ST is closed and opened, temporary stop SPL is turned off, and automatic operation is restarted.

The cycle start output STL is turned on also.

Timing chart for input of cycle start (ST), feedhold (*SP), and cycle start (STL) and temporary stop (SPL) is shown in Fig. 20.1.

,, -;~

‘TL

%F

.Sp

CLOSED

OPENED

~

I u

‘PL I

1

1

%F

CONTROL

STATE FEED. ~y~L~ S~A~~

(

HOLD

1 iJ

I

II

)

I

1

FEEDHOLD CYCLESTART

Fig. 20.1

Notes :

1. Be sure to keep the cycle start (ST) and feedhold (*SP) input contacts closed or open at least for 100 ms. If the duration is shorter than this, the input may sometimes be neglected.

138

2.

When the feedhold (*SP) input contact is opened, with the control waiting for the completion of the M, S, T command

(waiting for FIN input) , feedhold (SPL) output is turned on, but when the M, S, T, command completion (FIN) input contact is opened, the control enters feedhold state.

20.2.2.

INPUT AND OUTPUT FOR CONTROL OPER-

ATION MODES (JOG, H, S, T, MD!, MEM, EDT, AUT,

MAN)

(1) Operation Mode Input

The following six operation modes of the control are selected by the respective input contacts.

JOG: Manual jog mode

H: Manual handle

S: Manual step feed mode

T: Tape operation mode

MD1 Manual data input operation mode

MEM: Memory operation mode

EDT: Program editing mode

1

1

I

Manual operation

Automatic operation mode

When any of the input contacts is closed, the corresponding operation mode is turned on.

(a) JOG: Manual jog mode input

When the JOG input contact is closed, and other mode input con-tacts are opened, the control enters the manual jog mode, and the machine is jogged in the respective directions in response to the input of +X, -X, +Y, -Y, +Z, -Z, +c( and -rx signals.

(b) H: Manual HANDLE mode input

When the H input contact is closed, and other mode input contacts are opened, the control enters the manual handle mode and the machine will be fed manually by the manual pulse generator according to the specified multiplication factor on the selected axis.

(c) S: Manual STEP feed mode

When the S input contact is closed, and other mode input contacts are opened, the control enters the manual step feed mode and the machine will be fed in steps.

(d) T: Tape operation mode

When the T input contact is closed and other mode input contacts are opened, the control enters the tape operation mode, and the machine will be controlled by the tape commands read by the tape reader.

(e) MDI: Manual data input operation mode input

When the MDI input contact is closed, and other mode input contacts are opened, the control enters the manual data input mode, and part programs will be written or the machine will be operated through MDI.

(~ MEM: Memory operation mode input

When the MEM input contact is closed, and other mode input contacts are opened, the control enters the memory operation mode, and the machine will be controlled by part programs stored in the memory.

(g) EDT: Program edit mode

When the EDT input contact is closed and other operation mode input contacts are open, the control enters the program edit mode, and it can store part programs into the memory, correct and change them.

(2) Operation Mode Output

The control outputs the following signals to inform the current ope-ration mode.

(a) AUT: Automatic operation mode output

This output signal is turned on when the control is in the T (tape operation), MEM (memory operation), or MDI (manual data input operation) mode.

(b) MAN: Manual operation mode output

This output signal is turned on when the control is in the H

(manual handle operation), S (manual step operation) or JOG

(manual jog) mode.

(c) EDTS: Editing output

This output signal is turned on when the control is in the EDT

(pro-gram editing) mode, and also performing and editing operation (part program reading, collation, punching, and stored progrm changing and other processing).

MEM

(INPUT)

1

EDT

(INPUT)

Notes :

1. When any operation-mode-input except manual operation mode is given during NC program operation in the memory operation mode, the control stops the execution of the part program after the execution of the current block. The some applies to the part program operation in the tape and MDI mode.

2. When a mancrat-operation-mode-inputcontact is closed during the execution of a part program in the memory operation mode, the following changes take place.

i. Motion command

The current motion stops after deceleration, and the program is interrupted. The remaining program can be restarted when the automatic operation mode is turned on again and the cycle start

(SP) input contact is closed.

ii. M, S, T command

The sampling outputs (MF, SF, TF) and the M code outputs are turned off, and the M, S, T command is regarded to have been executed completely.

Even when the contol is returned to the automatic operation mode, the interrupted M, S, T command is not resumed,

3. When an automatic operation mode or program editing mode input contact is closed during motion in the manual operation mode, the motion decelerates and stops.

4. When any of these operation mode input contacts is closed, that mode becomes effective,

Under other input states, the previous operation mode remains effective. When no operation-mode-input-contacts is closed after the energization , or when two or more operation-mode-inputcontacts are closed, the control enters the manual jog mode.

AUT

(OUTPUT)

MAN

(OUTPUT)

EDTS

(OUTPUT)

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

Fig.

20.2

~

1

I

I

I

In

READING-IN

I I

I

I

I

I MEM

(INPUT)

~

T

(INPUT)

-

I

JOG

(INPUT)

OPERATION

‘ODE ‘F

THE CON-

TROL

~

MEMORY OPER.

ATION MODE

I

I

I

TAPE fjpER.

ATION MODE

I

I

I

I

-

MANUAL

FEED

JOG

Fig.

20.3

5. When a manual operation mode input contact is closed during the tapping process in a part program, the automatic operation mode is retained while the thread is being cut.

139

20.2.3

MANUAL RAPID FEEDING SELECTION (RT)

INPUT

When the control is in the manual jog mode and this input is closed, feeding in the manual feeding direction “+X’, “-X”, “+Y”, “-Y”,

“+Z’, “-Z”, “+~”, or “-a” is performed in the rapid feeding speed.

19.2.4

MANUAL FEED AXIS DIRECTION SELECTION

(+X, -X, +Y, -Y, +Z, -Z, +cx,-u) INPUT

These inputs specify the motion direction and the axis to be moved when the control is in the manual jog mode, RT mode or manual step feed mode.

Each axis moves when either of plus or minus direction axis contact is closed.

If all the axes are selected, maximum number of simultaneous controllable axes will work.

When both plus and minus direction contacts for each axis are closed or opened, the selected axis cannot move or decelerates to stop during motion.

20.2.5

MANUAL HANDLE / STEP MULTIPLICATION

FACTOR (MPI , MP2, MP4) INPUT

When the control is in the manual handle/ manual step feed mode, the motion distance per step is determined by these input signals.

Table 20.1

MP 1 MP2 MP4

Manual Step

Feed

Manual Feed

Hndle

(1) Manual Handle Feed Axis Selection (HX, HY, HZ, Ha,) Input

This is the input signal for selecting the motion axis for the motion by the manual pulse generator, with a control provied with a mat-ual pulse generator.

When the HX input contact is closed and the HY, HZ and Hct input contacts are open, the motion takes place along the X-axis.

When the HY input contact is closed and the HX, HZ and Hcx input contacts are open, the motion takes place along the Y-axis.

When the HZ input contact is closed and HY, HZ and Ha input contacts are open, the motion takes place along the Z-axis.

When the Hct input contact is closed and HX, HY and HZ input contacts are open, the motion takes place along the et-axis.

If any input other than above is provided, any axis will not move.

o 0

10r O

1: Closed, O:Open

1

1

10,000pulses/ step

100,000pulses/ step

100 pulses/ step

100 pulses/ step

20.2.6

FEEDRATE OVERRIDE (OV1, OV2, OV4,

OV8, OV16) INPUT AND FEED OVERRIDE CANCEL

(OVC) INPUT

(1) These input signals are for specifying override speeds between O and 200% at 10% intervals on the programmed speeds.

Table 20.2

o

1 o

1 o

1 o

1 o

1 o

1 o

1

1 o o

1 o

1 o

1

1 o

1

Ovl

0

1 o

1 o

1 o

1: CLOSED, O:OPEN

OV2 0V4

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

0

1

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1 I

1

1

1

1

1

1

I

1

1

1

0

1

1

1

1

1

0

0V8 0V16

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

I

Note :

For the control with feedrate override option, feedrate override is adjustable between 220% and 540%.

Feedrate Overnde

(Automatic Operation

Mode) o%

1090

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

90%

100%

110’%

120%

130’%0

140’%0

150%

160%

170%

180%

190%

200%

220%

240%

260%

280%

300%

340%

380%

420%

460%

500%

540%

(2) Feed Override Cancel (OVC) Input

This is the input for fixing the feedrate override at 100%. When the OVC input contact is closed, the feedrate in part program exe-cution in the automatic operation modes is locked at the pro-grammed value, irrespective of the override input conditions.

20.2.7

MANUAL JOG FEEDRATE SELECTION (JV1 ,

JV2,JV4,JV8,JV16) INPUT

(1) These inputs specify the manual jog feedrates in the manual

JOG mode.

(2) The manual jog feedrates can be used as the feedrates for part program dry run execution in the automatic operation mode. For details, refer to “20. 2.14 Dry Run (DRN) Input.”

Table 20.3

o

1

1: CLOSED, O: OPEN

JV1 I JV2 I JV4 I JV8 I JV16

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

I

Manual Jog Feedrate

(Manual Operation Mode)

Parameter Setting

#6233

#6234

1 o

1 o

1 o

1 o

1 o

1

1 o

1 o

1

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

1

1

1

0

1

1

0

I

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

I

I

#6240

#6246

#6247

#6248

#6249

#6250

#625 1

#6252

#6253

#6254

#6255

#6256

#6257

#6258

#6259

141

20.2.8

RAPID FEEDRATE OVERRIDE (ROV1 , ROV2)

INPUT

When once the machine is turned to the reference point in highspeed reference point return (automatic, return), the return motion, thereafter will be in the positioning motion to the determined reference point. See Fig. 20.5.

These input are for determining the rapid feedrates, i.e., the positioning speed when executing programs in the automatic operation modes, and the motion speed in the manual jog mode when the RT input contact is closed.

=-l=

xaxis claxis r

1: Closed, O:

Open

SPEED

RAPID TRAVERSE

( # 6280, #6281, # 6282, # 6283)

Table 20.4

//

1 0 1 0

1 1 0 0

#6280 #6280

Setting Setting x * speed speed

Y

SPEED

SEQUENCE

#6280

Setting x ~ speed

Fig. 20.5

Reference Point Return Motion

#6281 #6281 .

Setting Setting x* speed speed

#6281 .

Setting x ~ speed after First Power ON

#6231

Setting and Reference Points (ZPX, ZPY, ZPZ, ZPct) Output

Wspeed

Setting Setting x ~ speed

Setting x ~

(2) X, Y, Z speed speed

While the machine is remaining at the reference point after the reference point return motion or positioning to the reference point, the ZPX, ZPY, ZPZ and ZPrx output contacts are closed.

If the actual position is within *3 pulses from the reference point due to the use of metric input in the inch output system or the use of inch input in the metric output system, the ZPX, ZPY,

20.2.9

REFERENCE POINT RETURN CONTROL 1/0

SIGNALS (ZRN, XDECX, xDECZ, xDECU, xZPX,

ZPY, zPa)

ZPZ and ZP(Xoutput contacts are closed.

(3) 2nd Reference Point (2ZPX, 2ZPY, 2ZPZ, 2ZPrx) Output

These are input and output signals for bringing the machine to the machine reference point upon the energization of the control.

The following reference point return methods are available.

(1) Grid Method

After turning on the power supply, when the manual jog mode is turned on , and the manual reference point return input contact ZRN is closed, the direction of axis motion set by parameter (DO, D1, D2, D3) will result in the reference point return motion as shown below.

(The same applies to the execution of G28 in the automatic operation modes. )

When the machine has been positioned to the 2nd reference point by the execution of the part program command G30 in the auto-matic operation mode, the 2ZPX, 2ZPY, 2ZPZ and 2ZPa output reays are closed, and remain closed as long as the machine remains at this point.

The end reference point is defined by the distance from the reference point as set by parameters (#6612, #6613, #6614, #6615).

(4) 3rd Reference Point (3ZPX, 3ZPY, 3ZPZ, 3ZPrx) Output

When the machine has been positioned to the 3rd reference point by the execution of the part program command G30P3 in the automatic operation mode, the 3ZPX, 3ZPZ and 3ZPcx output relays are closed. The 3rd reference point is defined by the distance from the reference point as set by parameters

(#6618, #6619, #6620, #6621).

SPEED RAPID TRAVERSE RATE

(#62S0, #6261, #62S2, #62S3)

,/

APPROACH SPEED 1

(#63~0, #6311, #6312, #6313)

-2,630

I I

DECEL LS SIGNAL

I II (* OECX, * DECY, * DECZ,

(5) 4th Reference Point (4ZPX, 4ZPY, 4ZPZ, 4ZPCX)Output

When the machine has been positioned to the 4th reference point by the execution of the part program command G30P4 in the automatic operation mode, the 4ZPX, 4ZPY, 4ZPZ and

4zPrx output relays are closed.

The 4th reference point is defined by the distance from the reference point as set by parameters (#6624, #6625, #6626, #6627).

~..-

Fig 20.4

~,=rJ p:~j”~~~

20.2.10

MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON/ OFF(ABS)lNPUT

During the execution of part program in the automatic operation mode, the control stores the command values in an internal commandvalue register (command values aredisplyed on the 1st CRT area), and the displacement distance between the stored value and the coordinate value in the part program.

Since the control must also control the current position, it controls the current values in the absolute coordinate system to be displayed inthe2nd CRTarea.

Thecoordinate system isdefined bya coordinate system setting command.

This input is for determining whether the current value in the absolute coordinate system is transferred to the command value register or not at the start of the execution of the respective blocks of part programs in the automatic operation mode.

. When ABS input relay is open: Does not transfer.

. When ABS input relay is closed: To retransferred, except when circuit interpolation is used.

The motion path after a manual control intervention in the automaticoperation mode ischanged as follows by anABS input.

(1) When ABS Input Relay is Open

The motion path after an intervention by manual axial motion, is the one shifted parallel from the original path by the distance covered by the manual motion.

GQ(I (JO1 ~~().oo() FM:

X20.000

Xlo.000

Y30.000

Y40,000

—0

{

;:0.000

0.000

(2) When ABS Input Relay is Closed.

Fig. 20,7

(3) Supplementary Description

In the following cases, the control current value in the absolute coordinate system (coordinate system displayed in the CRT current value 2nd area, or the one determined by coordinate system setting instructions) to the command value register unconditionally.

(a) RESET operation: MDI panel RESET key--on or external reset

(ERS) input contact closed

(b) End of program: Program reset through end of program (EOP) input contact closing by M02, M30 execution

(c) Automatic return to reference point: Execution of G28command

After transferring the current value in the absolute coordinate system to the command value register, manual axial movement is reflected on the automatic axial movement even when the

ABS input contact is closed.

When the bloko is searched again by the RESET operation after axial motions by manual operation, the following motion takes place.

{

:4:::: {

x 10.000

Y40.000

(f) When the machine is manually moved during a block.

—

{

~g’g::

-J+:.

u

Axis motion by manual operation

Fig. 20.6

Fig. 20.8

143

20.2.11

SINGLE BLOCK (SBK) INPUT

This input is for executing part programs by one block in the automatic operation mode.

With the control in the automatic operation mode, and the SBK input contact closed, when an automatic operation cycle is started, the part program is executed only by one block, and the machine stops.

When the SBK input contact is closed during the execution of a part program, the control stops the machine after the execution of the current block.

For details of the use of single block during the execution of

. . .

.

mtrltlple cycles, macro programs, rerer to tne

.

..”...----rAbNAL J3UIV1

Instruction Manual

(TOE-C843-12.30).

20.2.12

OPTIONAL BLOCK DELETE

BDT9) INPUT

(BDT, BDT2-

This input is for determining whether data between”/” and “EOB” in a part program is executed or neglected when the part program contains” /”.

Table 20.5

~

BDT INPUT CLOSED

BDT2 INPUT CLOSED

BDT31NtWTCLOSt3D

J

I

‘eg’ec’ed ‘a’abetween

“f” or “/1” and

(End of block)

“EOB”

“/2” and “EOB”

!

I “,3$and’’EOB>>

BDT41NPUTCLOSED I “/4’>and’’EOB,

BDT5 INPUT CLOSED

BDT6 INPUT CLOSED

BDT7 INPUT CLOSED

BDT8 INPUT CLOSED

BDT9 INPUT CLOSED ccf5°and “EOB”

“/6” and “EOB”

“/7” and “EOB”

“/8” and “EOB”

“/9” and “EOB”

Notes:

1. Data can be neglected only when part programs are executed. When storing or processing part programs, this input has no effect.

2. Whether data may be neglected or not depends on the state of the optional block skip input relay when the block containing “/” in a part program is stored in the buffer.

Therefore, when controlling the optional delete input relay by an extemrd circuit with the use of the auxiliary function, take care to set the input state before the block containing “/” is stored in the buffer.

20.2.13

MACHINE LOCK (MLK) AND DISPLAY LOCK

(DLK) INPUT

(1) Machine Lock (MLK) Input

This is the input for preventing the output of control output pulses to the servo unit. While the MLK input contact is closed, even when the logic circuit distributes pulses in the automatic and man-ual operation modes, the machine does not move.

As the logic cir-cuits distribute pulses, the current value display changes with the instructions.

The controller must be stopped while MLK contact is closed or opened.

The operation is not influenced except during block stop or feedhold state.

(2) Display Lock (DLK) Input

This input is for preventing the output pulses of the control from being displayed on the external current value display.

While the

DLK input contact is closed, even when the machine is controlled automatically or manually, the external current value display (CRT-POS “EXTERNAL”) does not change.

20.2.14

DRY RUN (DRN) INPUT

This input is for changing the feed rates of the tools during the execution of part programs in the automatic mode to the rates selected by the manual continuous feed selection inputs (JV1, 2, 4,

8 and 16).

While the DRN input contact is closed, the feedrate during the execution of part programs in the automatic mode are changed from the programmed ones to the ones selected by the manual continuous feed selection inputs.

When the DRN input contact is closed or opened during the automatic operation of the control, the following change takes place.

During mm/rev feeding:

No change of feedrate for the current block.

During mm/min feeding:

Feedrate changes even during the current block.

NOTE

When parameter #6006 D2 is set to 1, while the DRN input contact is closed, the feedrate in positioning command is changed to a manual continuous feedrate.

20.2.15

PROGRAM RESTART (SRN) INPUT

This input is used when a part program is to be started again after interruption.

Close the SRN input contact, turn on the memory mode, and search the sequence number of program restart by the

NC operator’s panel.

The M, S, T codes present between the leading end of the program and the searched sequence ntr~ber are displayed on the CRT.

For the details of the uses of the uses of the PST input, refer to

Par. 5.2.4, program Restart in YASNAC J50M Instruction Manual

(TOE-C843-12.30).

20.2.16

EDIT LOCK (EDTLK)

This is the input for preventing the change of the contents of the stored part program.

While the EDTLK input contact is closed, the following operations among the ones in the program edit mode are prohibited.

1. Storing part programs by the MEM DATA “IN’ key.

2. The change, addition and deletion of part programs in the memory are made with the EDIT “ALT,” “INS” and “ERS” keys.

20.2.17

AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK (AFL) INPUT

This is the input for omitting the M, S, T, function in executing part programs in the automatic operation mode.

While the AFL input contact is closed, the control ignores M. S.

T. instructions of programs when executing part programs.

However, M code decoded outputs (MOOR, MOIR, M02R, M30R) are output.

When the AFL input contact is closed or opened during the execution of part programs, the change becomes effective from the block subsequent to the current block.

NOTE

Analog outputs at S-command 5 digits are provided as commanded when “AFL” input is closed.

20.2.18

OVERTRAVEL (x+ LX, x-LX, x+LY, x-LY,

*+L Z, x-LZ, x+Lu, x-Let,) INPUT

These input signals are for signifying the arrival of the machine slides to their respective stroke ends.

When these overtravel input contacts are opened, the machine slides stop motion as shown below, and close the alarm (ALM) output contact and at the same time, displays alarm on the CRT.

\

* +LX

Input opened

* .LX

Input opened

* +LY

Input opened

* _L~

Input opened

I direction ‘

Motion stop in -rx direction

I

*Activating at LOW. (Normally closed contacts.)

When an overtravel input contact is opened, move the machine in the reverse direction in the manual operation mode (manual, jogging or manual pulse generator) to close the contact, and then, make the RESET operation to clear the alarm output and display.

NOTE

Even when the overtravel input contacts are opened, the M code reading output MF, S code reading output SF, and the T code reading output TF are not turned off. If the motion by

M codes, S codes or T codes is required to be stopped by overtravelling inputs, interlock the motion with external sequence.

20.2.19

Table 20.6

Manurd Operation

Mod.

Motion stop in +X direction

Motion stop in -X direction

Motion stop in +Y

MACHINE-READY

Automatic Operation

Mode

(MRD) INPUT

This input informs that the external heavy-current circuit is ready.

When MRD input is closed after closing of Servo Power Input/

Output (SVON) from the power-on/off unit of the control after the power is turned on, the control is ready and “RDY” is displayed on the CRT screen.

When MRD input is opened with the control being ready, the control is put in the alarm state (alarm code “280” is displayed), thereby stopping the operation.

20.2.20

EXTERNAL RESET (ERS) INPUT AND

RESET ON (RST)OUTPUT

ERS is the input to reset the control.

When ERS input is closed, the control stops all of its operation, closing reset On outputs RST for one second.

The output signals are opened except for the following.

Table 20.7

Output at ERS Input Closed Output Signals

AUT, MAN lZPX, lZPY, IZPZ lzPcx,

2ZPX, 2ZPY, 2ZPZ

2zPct,

3ZPX, 3ZPY, 3ZPZ

3zPcx,

4ZPX, 4ZPY, 4ZPZ

4zPrs,

4NGC, 5NGC sol-2, PO1-2

Previous conditions kept.

RST

Output contact is closed for one second while ERS input contact is closed or opened.

Contact kept closed unless alarm causing factor is cleared.

AL

SB1-S1312

SDA1-SDA16

S11-S48

B] 1-B48

UOO-15

I

Previous conditions kept.

Previous conditions kept.

Note : When ERS input is closed, the controI is put in the label skip state. However, memory is rewound, while the tape is not.

20.2.21

INTERLOCK (STLK) INPUT

This input stops the spindle travel in the automatic operation mode.

As long as “STLK’ input is closed, spindle travel will not start by closing “ST” input.

20.2.22

ALARM (ALM) OUTPUT AND EXTERNAL

ERROR DETECT (ERRO-2) INPUTS

(1) Alarm (ALM) Output

These outputs inform that the control is in the alarm state.

ALM: This output is closed on detection of ahrrn.

(However, the alarm for the fault of the logic circuitry in the control is not included.)

These outputs are opened again when the cause of the detected alarm has been removed and RESET operation is performed.

(2) External Error Detect (ERRO, ERR1, ERR2) Inputs

These inputs put the control in the alarm state from the outside.

ERRO: When this input is closed, the control displays alarm code

“180” and is put in the alarm state. If this input is closed during the execution of the part program in the automatic operation mode, the execution is stopped on completion of the block being executed.

ERR1: When this input is closed, the control displays alarm code

“500” and is put in the alarm state. If this input is closed during the execution of the part program in the automatic operation mode, the tool travel is immediately stopped.

ERR2: When this input is closed, the control displays alarm code

“400” and is put in the alar-m state. If this input is closed during the execution of the part program in the automatic operation mode, the tool travel is immediately slowed down and stopped.

20.2.23

MIRROR IMAGE (MIX, MIY, MIZ, Mlu)

This input inverts the traveling direction in the automatic operation mode.

This input is effective with setting #6000 DO-D4 at

“0.”

When automatic activation is performed with MIX, MIY, MIZ and MIcx input closed, the directions of X-, Y-, Z-, 4th, 5th axis are made opposite to the specified direction.

Mirror image input does not affect the axis travel in the manual operation mode.

For details, refer to 2. 8.5 Mirror Image ON/OFF

(M95, M94) in YASNAC J50M Instruction Manual (TOE-C843-

12.30).

20.2.24

M, S, T AND X6 CODES (MO1 THROUGH

M08, S11 THROUGH S28, T11 THROUGH T48, 611

THROUGH 638, MF, SF, TF, *BF, FIN) lNPUTS/

OUTPUTS

(1) M, S, T and *B Codes Output and M, S, T and *B Codes

Reading Outputs

Table 20.8

M code output

S code output

T code output

B code output

MO1-M08

S11, S12, S14, S18, S21, S22, S24, S28,

S31. S32. S34. S38, S41, S42, S44, S48

I

I Tl, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6, T7, T8, T9, TIO,

T1l, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T18, T21,

T22. T24. T28. T31, T32, T34, T38, T41,

T42: T44, T48

Bl, B2, B3, B4, B5, B6, B7, B8, B9, B1O,

B1l, B12, B13, B14, B15, B16, B18, B21,

B22, B24, B28, B31, B32, B34, B38, B41,

B42, B44, B48

M code reading output

S code reading output

T code reading output

B code reading

MF

SF

146

These are outputs for the M, S, T and *B commands specified by the part program at its execution in the automatic operation mode.

If any of M, S, T and *B commands is found at the execution of the part program in the automatic operation mode, the control outputs it in a BCD or binary code according to the value that follows the detected command (M= 2 digits/3 digits, S = 2 digits, T

= 4 digits, *B = 3 digits).

Then, after the elapse of the time set in parameter (#6220), the

M, S, T and *B code reading outputs are closed.

NOTE

M code or MF code of M commands (M90 through M99) in the logical circuit processing will not output.

(4) Time Chart of M, S, T and *B Signals

(a) M command

INPUT

“FIN” z~”’’”x’

I

I I

I

(b) SjT/XB command

----

S/T/x B CODE

(2) M Decode (MOOR, MOIR, M02R, and M30R) Output

When any of M commands “MOO,” “MO1 ,“ “M02,” and “M30” is executed, the corresponding decoded output “MOOR,”

“MOIR,” “M02R,” or “M30R” is output in addition to the M code output and the M code reading output.

NOTE

When an M command for decoded output and a move command are specified in the same block, the M code output is provided at the start of the block, while the decoded output is provided after completion of the move command.

Z’*

“FIN”

INPUT

I

1

PARAMETER

SETTING TIME

# 6220

Fig. 20.9

(c) If a move command and an M, S, T or *B command are specified in the same block, the move operation and the M, S, T or

*B operation are executed simultaneously.

(3) M, S, T and *B Functions Completion (FIN) Inputs

These inputs give the completion of M, S, T and XCBcommands to the control. When FIN input is closed while the M, S, T and

X B code reading (MF, SF, TF and XBF) outputs are closed, they are opened.

If FIN input is opened again after making sure of their opening, the control assumes that the M, S, T or *B command has been completed, starting the operation of the next step.

When

NOTE

FIN input is closed then opened, the M code output and the M decoded output are all opened, but the S, T and

*B code outputs remain as they are without change.

“FIN” INPUT ~

Fig. 20.10

—

20.2.25

POSITIONING COMPLETION (DEN) OUT-

PUTS

These outputs inform the completion of a move command when an

M, S, T or *B command and the move command have been specified in the same block at the execution of a part program in the automatic operation mode.

The block in which an M, S, T or *B command and a move command are specified at the same time is executed, if the M, S, T or *B command is not completed at the termination of the move command, positioning completion output DEN is closed.

When FIN input is closed then opened and the M, S, T or XB command is completed, the positioning completion outputs are opened.

147

20.2.26

TRAVEL ON (OP), TAPPING AND CANNED

CYCLE ON (G80S) Outputs

(1) Travel ON (OP) OUTPUTS

With these outputs, the control informs that the tool is traveling during the execution of a part program in the automatic operation mode.

These outputs are closed when the machine starts.

The output is turned off by RESET operation (including RESET by M02, M30 command).

(2) Tapping (TAP) Output

With these outputs, the control informs that tapping is being per-formed during the execution of part program in the automatic ope-ration mode.

These outputs are given when tapping starts from point R to point Z and turned off when tapping from point Z to point R is completed.

(3) Canned Cycles (G80S) Output

This output indicates that the control is performing canned cycles.

The output G80S is given when canned cycle block starts and turned off by canned cycle block cancellation.

20.2.27

END-OF-PROGRAM (EOP) INPUT, REWIND

(RWD) INPUT, AND REWIND ON (RWDS) OUTPUTS

(1) End-Of-Program (EOP) and Rewind (.RWD) Inputs

With these outputs, the control determines what processing is to be performed at completion of an M02 or M30 command.

The control performs the following processing depending on the state of EOP and RWD inputs when completion input FIN for an M02 or M30 command is opened then closed:

Table 20.9

EOP RWD

1

1 o o

1

0

1

0

Processing

The control is standby after rewindhg part programs and resetting programs.

The control is at standby after resetting programs.

The control is at standby after resetting part programs.

The control is at standby

1: Closed, O:Open

Notes :

1. Program reset provides the same effects as with pressing of

RESET key on MDI panel and the reset operation by closing

External Reset (ERS) input.

In the program reset, however, the NC memory rewind operation is not performed.

2. Some parameters make resetting output RST “closed” for a second at program resetting.

#6009 (D4)

When both RWD and

EOP are input or only EOP is input at

M02/M30:

1: RST output provided

O:RST output not provided

(2) Rewind ON (RWDS)

With these outputs, the control informs that the part program is being rewound.

If the part program is rewound by RWD input for an M02 or M30 command, RWDS2 is closed during the rewinding operation.

To use these outputs, set parameter #6007 D4 to ‘<1.“ At “O,” they are not given from the control.

20.2.28

EXTERNAL DATA INPUT (EDO THROUGH

ED15, EDSA THROUGH EDSD, EDSAO THROUGH

EDSA2, EDCL, EREND AND ESEND) lNPUTS/OUT-

PUTS

(1) These inputs/outputs are used to make the machine perform the following functions by external inputs:

(a) External work number search

External inputting of 4-digit program (1 to 9999 BCD) selects the work number desired.

(b) External tool compensation input

This external input signals can command compensation values for tool length and diameter.

(c) External work coordinate system shift

The work coordinate system shift value can be entered externally.

Externally entered axis correction value is added to the shift value of the specified axis programmed by G54 to G59 and the result is stored as a new shift vahte.

(2) Input/Output Signals for Inputting External Data

(a) External data inputs (EDO to ED15)

These inputs are used for work number input signal, offset amount input signal snd work coordinate system shift signal.

1

ED7 ED6

External Data Input Signal

ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 EDO

I

ED15 ED14 ED13 ED12 ED1l ED1O ED9

I

Sign

(b) External data selection (EDSA to EDSD)

Inputted data can be selected by the external data.

ED8

I

Table 20.10

External Work No.

Decimation

External Tool

Compensation

External Tool

Compensation

(H)

External Coordinate

Shift

(D)

1: Closed, O:Open

I External Data Input Selection

EDSD EDSC EDSB EDSA o

0

0 o

0

0

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

0

(c) External data axis selection (EDASO to EDAS2)

This signal is used forspecifying theaxis forextemal data and given in three bits.

Table 20.11

External Data Axis Selection

(4) Time Chart of Inputting External Data

EXTERNAL DATA INPUT

(EDO-ED15)

EXTERNAL DATA,

AXIS SELECTION

(EDASO-EDAS2)

EXTERNAL

DATA SELECTION

STROBE

(EDCL)

INPUT COMPLETION

(EREND)

OUTPUT

,

!

,

I i

I

:

,,

,,

32ms 8ms

OR MORE

4

:

‘

DATA READING-IN f[’,

1)

Fig. 20.11

For external work number input, when it is inputted ESEND instead

EREND is given as input completion output.

X-axis

Y-axis

Z-axis

4th axis

ABS/INC

ABS/INC

ABS/lNC

I ABS/INC I o o

1

1 I

0

1

0

1

EXTERNAL DATA INPUT

(EDO-ED15) x

DATA DESIGNATION INPUT X

(EDSA-EDSD)

DATA REQUEST

INPUT (EDCL)

~

,

~ 8ms OR MORE

“

,

Y

ABS=l , INC=O

All external coordinate system shifts are of INC.

(d) External data selection strobe (EDCL)

External data input starts when this signal rises up.

(3) Output signal for external data input

When input data described in (a) to (d) are inputted and stored in the internal memory, it is indicated by outputting completion signal (EREND or ESEND).

SEARCH

OUTPUT pROGRAM

COMPLETION

(ESEND) sEARCH ~

Fig. 20.12

\

)

1---

(5) List of External Data Input/Output

\

External Data

Input/Output

External Work No,

Designation

External Tool Compen.

sation (H)

,,,p,

Strobe

ED

CL

External Tool Compem sation (D)

External Coordinate

Svstem ~hift

.

Ax,s

Selection

Util?l

Selection

(a) Inputs (24) (See Table 20. 12.)

Table 20.12

ED

ED ED ED ED ED ED ED ED ED ED ED ED ED ED ED ED ED ED ED ED ED ED

AS 1 AS2 AS3 SD

Sc

SB SA 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 (1

A13S/ _

INC

ABSI lNC

_

— o 0 0 1

— o 0 1 0 SIGN

—

—

WNolooo o 0 1 1

SIGN t7999 (BCD) OR o 1 0 0 SIGN *32767 (B~ARY)

External Data

WND1OO WND1O WND1

Selected by pararneter.f

T Parameter selection #6040 D7 l=BCD, O=BINARY BCD:

4 di~it

[1 1-9999

20.2.28

EXTERNAL DATA INPUT (EDO THROUGH

ED15, EDSA THROUGH EDSD, EDSAO THROUGH

EDSA2, EDCL, EREND AND ESEND) lNPUTS/OUT-

PUTS (Cent’d)

(b) Outputs (2)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO

TAP M04S TLMO G80S EREND ESEND RST AL

Externaldata input end

External search end ~

I

SUPPLEMENTARY EXPLANATION

(1) External Work No. Designation

(a) Input-completion output is not given when work number other than O

to

9999 is designated or work number is not found.

In this case,

alarm

is not given.

(b) Work number input is permitted by external reset operation or at the time of execution of M02 or M30. After reset operation, new work number is effective.

(2) External Tool Offset

(a) The offset number to be modified is selected by program

(b) Type of modification is selected by external input

as

follows.

EDAS2=0—Externally value.

inputted data is added

to

the stored

EDAS2=l—Extemally inputted data is replaced with the stored data.

(c) External tool number address is selected by two bits of external data select (EDSA-EDSB) as follows.

EDSA=’’O,” EDASB=’< 1“-H For tool length offset

EDSA=’< 1,“ EDASB=’< 1“-D for tool diameter offset

(d) If tool offset number is not selected (H is set at 00 or D is set at

00), input-completion signal is given without changing any offset value.

(e) The offset value changed by external input is effective with the block including tool length offset (G43, G44) and tool diameter offset (G41, G42) command.

Tool position offset A (G45

to

G48) is effective with the next block including the command

(G45

to

G48).

(f) Axis selection input EDASO, EDAS1 is not required for external tool offset. If designated, the input is ignored.

(g) The offset amount commanded by external tool offset input is equivalent to the amount entered by MDI key.

(3) External Work Coordinate System

(a)

The shift value commanded by external work coordinate system shift is equivalent to the value entered by MDI key.

(b) The shift value commanded by external work coordinate system shift input is added

to

the stored shift value (G54 to G59).

20.2.29

CANNED CYCLE SPINDLE

(FMF, FFIN, SSP, SRV, OS, TAP)

CONTROL

FMF — Canned cycle auxiliary signal reading-in

FFIN — Canned cycle auxiliary completion signal

SSP — Spindle stop

SRV — Spindle reverse

TAP — Tapping

Canned cycles can be performed by G74, G84, G86 to G88 commands.

At G74 and G84 commands, FMF and SRV are given, and

at

G86

to

G88 commands, FMF and SSP or stop the spindle.

FMF is turned off when FFIN is sent back to the control at completion of spindle reverse or stop.

Turn off signal FFIN when FMF is turned off.

When FFIN signal is stopped, the tool retraction from tapped hole is started.

Signals SRV from tapped hole is started.

Signals SRV and SSP will be turned off when the tool leaves the tapped hole.

Accordingly, reverse the spindle to the forward run.

Motion by

G74 and G84 commands, TAP signal is outputted indicating

TAPPING operation.

The TAP signal is used to check to see if the spindle runs at the beginning of tapping.

I

~

d

FFIN

Fig. 20.13

Time Chart of G74, G84

FFIN

Fig. 20.14

Time Chart of G86 through G88

150

Setting parameter #6018 (D4) to “O” selects signals (M03, M04,

M05, M19, MF, FIN) instead of canned cycles (FMF, SSP, SRV) in order to perform canned cycles.

In spindle reverse by G74 and

G84, spindle can be stopped by setting parameter #6018 (D5) to

“l. ”

Time chart is as follows.

Parameter #601 8 D5=0

D5=0

M03 ++ M04

M03 + M05 ++ M04

XY

\

\ DEN

~o(hihi~)

MF \MF

@

FINI FIN

TAP

I !

\

DEN

~oJ~rJ;)

MF MF la

FIN FIN m

+

_----_B

DEN

/

M CODE

MF

FIN

Fig. 20.18

Time Chart of G77

Fig, 20.15

Time Chart of G74, G84

—

DEN

/

M05

DEN

M03

~

“

FIN

/

L..__wd

FIN

Fig. 20.16

Time chart of G86 through G88

+Q

–Q

–Z

Ik, +Z f

+R

Fig. 20.19

Time Chart of M Command during Canned Cycle ON

Canned Cycle ON Signal (G80S)

When canned cycle starts, its output is given.

The canned cycle signal is stopped in canned cycle cancel block.

GOI (cANcEL) xl

Fig. 20.20

Canned Cycle ON Signal (G80S)

M19: ORlENT SPINDLE STOP

(SPINDLE STOP AT SPECIFIED POSITION)

Fig. 20.17

Time Chart of G76

151

20.2.30

SERVO OFF SIGNAL (XSVOFX, *SVOFY, xSVOFZ, %3VOF(X,)

This signal is used for cutting with the axis mechanically clamped.

When the signal * SVOFX to ct contacts are open, servo lock for a–axis is released.

To clamp the machine, use M-function.

Shown below is the time chart of servo off signal, machine clamp, auxiliary function and servo ready (SRDX to SRDct).

Output clamp command after positioning signal (DEN) is given.

M CODE

CLAMP COMMAND

UNCLAMP

COMMAND

MF

\

MACH

CLAM

* Svo

X+EDX Fig. 20.22

Cutting feed function (X+EDX to X+ED~) enable or disable can be set by parameter #6012 to #60 13.

#6012

D3 a

D2 z

D1

Y

DO x

D3

SRDX

FIN

*Activating at LOW.

(Normally closed contacts.)

Fig. 20.21

Time Chart of Servo Off Signal

When the signal * SVOFX to IXcontacts are open, parameter

#6064 can select execution or no execution of the follow-up process.

#6064, DO= 1: X-axis follow-up process

#6064, DO= O: X-axis no follow-up process

Other axes can be selected by D 1, D2 and D3 in succession.

When executing the follow-up process, shift the current NC value until the error counter becomes O, as if there has been a command corresponding to the machine motion.

In this case, even when the SVOFF signal is restored to close, the machine remains at the shifted position, and it moves to the correct position when a subsequent absolute command is given, because the current NC value has been shifted from the machine position.

Conversely, when no follow- up process is executed, the servo setting remains in the error counter.

Then the machine moves to cancel the setting when the SERVO OFF signal is restored to close.

20.2.31

EXTERNAL DECELERATION

EDX TO x+EDa, x-EDu)

(x+EDX, x-

This signal permits the maximum effective stroke of the machine in the control and controls the high-speed operation.

When the external deceleration signal corresponding to axis is turned on during rapid traverse or manual jog operation, if the axis direction coincides with commanded direction, the machine decelerates to the speed set by parameter #6340.

If not, it does not decelerate.

In this case, other axes will not have any effect.

152

External deceleration in plus direction

Enable =1, Disable =0

#60 13 c1 z Y x

External deceleration in minus direction

Enable =1, Disable =0

When the axis in moving meets the deceleration conditions, feedrate parameter #6341.

,coMMAND~

Fig. 20.23

When command speed is smaller than deceleration speed, command speed takes priority.

20.2.32

FI-DIGIT COMMAND (Fl)

(1) With

a digit of 1 through 9 after an address F, feedrates corresponding to these digits can selectively commanded.

F Command

F5

F6

F7

F8

F9

F1

F2

F3

F4

I F1-digit Speed Setting No.

#6561

#6562

#6563

#6564

#6565

#6566

#6567

#6568

#6569

Setting value’< 1”= 0.1 mm/min

(2) When F l-digit switch is turned on, the feedrate specified by F l-digit is increased or decreased by rotating manual pulse generator.

Feedrate increase or decrease value per 1 pulse is set by parameter (F 1-digit multiplication) as shown in the table below.

F Command

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

F9

I

I

Setting value” 1“ = 0.1 mm/min pulse

F 1-digit Multiplication

Parameter No.

#6141

#6142

#6143

#6 144

#6145

#6 146

#6 147

#6148

#6149

In result, the contents of F1 -digit speed setting are changed.

(3) Maximum Speed Limit

Maximum feedrate specified by F l-digit can be set by parameters listed in the table below, The value exceeding usual maximum feedrate specified by parameter #6228 will be limited by parameter #6228 value.

20.2.33

INTERFACE INPUT SIGNALS UIO-U115,

UOO-UO15 (#1 000 THROUGH #101 5, #1 032)

(1) When one of system variable #1000 through #1015 is specified to the right-hand of an operational expression, the on/off state of each of macro-program-dedicated 16-point input signal is read.

The relationships between the input signals and the system variables are shown below.

#loo7 #1006 #loo5 #loo4 #loo3 #loo2 #lool #looo

U17

2’

U16

26

U15 z,

U14

2’

U13

23

#lo15 #lo14 #lo13 #lo12 #loll

U115

2“

U114

2“

U113

2’3

U112

2“

UI1l

2“

U12

22

UI1

2’

U1O

2°

#lolo #loo9 #1008

UIlo

2’0

U19

2’

U18

28

Variable Value

1

o

YASNAC J50M

—-1

2°

2’

@

2’

Y

24

25

E

T

2’

2’

29

R

2“

211

2“

2“

2

,4

B

2

,5

~

I

I

UI o—

UI 1 ——

UI 2 ——

UI 3—

UI 4—

UI 5—

‘ UI 6+

UI 7—

UI 8 _—

UI 9 ——

UI 10 ——

UI 11 —

UI 12 ——

UI 13 _

UI 14 _

UI 15 ——

!

Input Signal

Contact Closed

Contact Open

,

+24

Parameter No.

#6226

#6227

I Function

Max feedrate by F1 to F4

Max feedrate by F5 to F9

Notes :

1. With this function, 1 to 9 mm/min cannot be commanded by usual

F-function. Command exceeding 10 mm/min can be made.

2. Programming FOwill be indicated by alarm “030.”

3. While Dry Run switch is on, dry run speed will take priority.

4. Feedrate override function will not work on F l-digit command.

5. Stored feedrate will be kept after turning off power.

Each read variable is 1.0 or 0.0 when the associated contact is

“closed” or “open” respectively, regardless of the unit system of the machine.

(2) When system variable #1032 is designated, the input signals

(UIO through U115) that consist of 16 points (16 bits) are collectively read as a decimal positive value.

Sample

15

#1032 = X/# [ 1000+ I ] *21

1=0

Program

(a) lF [#1015 EQO] GOTO 100;

Bit 2’5 (UI15) is read and, if it is “O,” a branch is made to sequence number N 100.

153

154

20.2.33

INTERFACE INPUT SIGNALS UIO-U115,

UOO-UO15 (#1 000 THROUGH #101 5, #1 032) (Cent’d)

(b) #130 = #1032 AND 255

Bit 2° through 2’ (UIO through U17) are collectively read to be stored in common variable #130 as a decimal positive value.

System variables #1000 through #1032 cannot be placed to the left-hand of operational expressions.

20.2.34

INTERFACE OUTPUT SIGNALS

(#1 100 THROUGH #1 115, #1 132) 1’

(1) When one of system variable #1 100 through #1 115 is specified to the left-hand of an operational expression, an on or off signal can be sent to each of user-macro-dedicated signals.

16-point output

The relationships between the output signals and the system variables are as shown below.

state.

#1 107 #l 106 #1 105 #l 104 #1 103 #1 102 #l 101 #l 100

U07

2’

U06

2’

U05

25

U04

24

U03

2.3

U02

22

#1115 #1114 #1113 #1112 #1111 #lllo

Uol

2’

Uoo

2“

#l 109 #1108

U015

2’5

U014

2’4

U013

2“

U012

2’2

Uoll

2“

Uolo

2’0

U09

2’

U08

2’

YASNAC J50M

;

2’

2’

2’

2’

26

27

2’

2’

2

2“

2—

2

10

13

14

15

~=+

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

‘===+=:::

s s

-~ q

Uo 2

Uo

Uo

Uo

UO

Uo

Uo

Uo

3

4

5

6

7 s

9

Uo 10

Uo 11

Uo 12

Uo 13

Uo 14

Uo 15

When 1.0 or 0.0 are substituted in any of #1 100 through #1 115, the associated output contact is output in the “closed” or “open”

(2) When system variable #1 132 is specified, the output signals

(UOO through U015) that consist of 16 points (16 bits) are collectively this time, the decimal positive value substituted in

#1132 is output in the form of binary 16-bit value.

15

#1132 =Z#[lOOO+I]

1=0

*21

(3) With system variables #1 100 through #1 132, the value sent last is retained.

Hence, when one of them is written to the righthand of an operational expression, its value is read.

(4) Considerations

When any values other than 1.0 or 0.0 are substituted into one of # 1100 through #1115, the values are handled as follows:

“Blank” is assumed to be “O.” Values other than “blank” and O are assumed to be “l. ”

Sample Program

(a)#l107 =#lO; (#10 = 1.5)

The output signal of bit 2’(U07) is outputted in the contact

(closed) state.

(b) #1132 = (#1132 AND 240) OR (#8;)

The output signal of bits 24 through 27 (U04 through U07) are outputted without change and contents of local variable #8 are outputted to the output signals of bits 2° through 23 (UOO through U03).

(Decimal 240) =11 110000

20.2.35

SKIP INPUT

If SKIP input is closed during the execution of move command by

G31 in the automatic operation mode, the control immediately stops the movement and stores the coordinate value where SKIP input changed from open to close.

At this point, the block ofG31 command is regarded to have been completed, and the following block is taken up.

The coordinate value of the skip position is stored in the following setting numbers.

The initial point coordinate value of the block ofG31 command is stored for the axis not being specified.

#6552 — X-axis coordinate value

#6553 — Y-axis coordinate value

#6553 — Z-axis coordinate value

#6553 — et-axis coordinate value

NOTE

1. The block of G31 command moves in the same way as

GO1. If parameter (#6019, D4) is set to “ 1,“ the feedrate which is not specified in the part program but is set to parameter #6232 is provided.

2. If SKIP input is not closed after the completion of the block of G31 command, the following operation takes place: a. When setting #6004, DO is set to “ 1,“ the following block is exe-cuted.

b. When setting #6004, DO is set to “O,” the alarm state

(alarm code “087”) is generated.

3. SKIP signal is effective, when turned off, by setting parameter #6024, D4.

4. There is a parameter for determing enable or disable for the skip input control circuit.

To enable the skip function, set parameter #6063, D1 to” 1.“

20.2.36

PROGRAM INTERRUPT (PINT) INPUT

This input is used to jump an NC program to be executed by the external input to a given location during the execution of a part program in the automatic operation mode.

When PINT input changes from open to close while the control is executing the block between M91 and M90 commands, it immediately discontinues this block and starts the execution of the part program of the program number (P) specified in the block of

M91.

Note

If PINT input changes from open to close when the control is at standstill after the execution of a block between M91 and

M90 commands on a single block basis, the execution of the part program specified in P is started at the time the automatic activation is performed.

20.2.38

TOOL LENGTH OFFSET (TLMI, RET, TLM O) lNPUTS/OUTPUTS

Opening TLMI contacts stores the Z-axis current value in the control as home position.

In this case, tool length mode indicating

TLMO is outputted.

Closing RET after moving Z-axis to the measured point stores the move distance of Z-axis from the home position in the offset memory.

Opening TLMI contact again cancels TLM mode and stops TLMO output.

20.2.39

INPUTS

AXIS INTERLOCK (lTX, ITY, ITZ, ITcx)

Axis interlock is provided with each axis for inhibiting axis motion.

(1) When axis interlock contact is opened during motion, the axis is coasted to stop.

Closing the interlock will resume the remaining operation interrupted by opening the interlock contact.

When the remaining operation is completed, operation will advance to the next block.

(2) For simultaneous controlled two axes or three axes in interpolation command, opening the axis interlock contact for any one axis of them stops interpolation and decelerates the axis to stop.

20.2.40

PLAYBACK (PLYBK) INPUT

To put the control in the Playback mode, close the playback input in the manual operatiom mode (HANDLE, STEP, JOG, RAPID) .

In the Playback mode, current value for each axis can be edited by

PROGRAM function key.

Usual manual operation is also permitted.

Open the Playback input contact and usual manual operation mode is obtained.

20.2.37

DISPLAY RESET (DRS) INPUT

These inputs set the external 3-axis current value display (EXTER-

NAL DISPLAY) on the CRT operator’s panel to “O.” They are used with Handle axis selection input.

HX

External display X-axis reset

DRS Closed

HY

HZ

Ha

Closed

Opend

Closed

Opend

Closed

Opend

Closed

Opend

External display Y-axis reset

External display Z-axis reset

External display a-axis reset

—

20.2.41

S5-DIGIT COMMAND (SDAI THROUGH S

DA16, DAS, SGSO, GRL, GRH, GRA, GRB, M04S, S1

NV, SFIN) lNPUTS/OUTPUT~

These signals are used to determine the speed of the spindle motor when the control is in the state of S command 5-Digit Non-Contact output or S Command 5-Digit Analog output.

GRA and GRB are used to enter the controI state of the gear range between the spindle and the spindle motor to determine the spindle motor speed by the spindle speed specified in the part program.

SINV input inverts the polarity of the anaiog output at the time of S command 5-Digit Analog output.

While the polarity is inverted, SINV signal is output.

When M03 command is executed, M04S contact is opened.

When M04 command is started. M04S contact is closed.

(1) S5-Digit Command 12-Bit Non-Contact Output

Binary code 12 bits (O to 4095 = spindle motor speed) are output as follows by the spindle motor speed command and

GR1 through GR4:

—.— ; The output when “GR 1” input is closed.

(Set the spindle motor maximum speed at gear range “GR 1” to parameter

#6271.)

—--; The output when “GR2” input is closed.

(Set the spindle motor maximum speed at gear range “GR2” to parameter

#6272.)

—--; The output when “GR3” input is closed.

(Set the spindle motor maximum speed at gear range “GR3” to parameter

#6273.)

—---; The output when “GR4” input is closed.

(Set the spindle motor maximum speed at gear range “GR4” to parameter

#6274.)

SPINDLE MOTOR spEED COMMANtJ o

t

GR1REV GR2REV GR3REV GR4REV

Fig. 20.24

SPINDLE

SPEED S

COMMAND

(2) S5-Digit Command Analog (DAS, SGSO) Outputs

Analog voltages (-10 V to O V to +10 V) are output as follows by the spindle speed command, GR1 through GR4 inputs, and SINV input:

SPINDLE MOTOR

SPEED COMMAND OUTPUT

+Kiv! ------e-=---

/r-----------

I

OUTPUT WITH

SINV INPUT

OPEN

CR2REV CR3REV GR4REV

SPINOLE

SPEED

COMMAND

SINV INPUT

‘VIYK

..

.

.,1

CLOSE

.

. .

I

‘+* ‘\” ‘ \.’\ I

,ov~-------u -— N_..

_w-...

-x-...—_

—.— :OUTPUT WITH “GRI” INPUT CLOSE

—“.— :OUTPUT WITH “GR2” INPUT CLOSE

—--.— :OUTPUT WITH “GR3” INPUT CLOSE

–....– :OUTPUT WITH “GR4 INPUT CLOSE

Fig. 20.25

(3) Time Chart of Analog Voltage Output, SINV Input, and SINVA

Output for Spindle Motor Speed

N%+=--+

SINVA OUTPUT !

;!

—

100 ms MAX

Fig.

20.26

(4) Spindle Maximum/Minimum Speed Clamp

The spindle maximurrdminimum speed at each gear range may be set using the following parameters:

Table 20.13

Parameter

#6266

#6267

#6268

#6269

#6276

#6277

#6278

#6279

I

Spindle maximum speed when “GRI” input is closed.

Spindle maximum speed when “GR2” input is closed.

Spindle maximum speed when “GRI” input is closed.

Spindle maximum speed when “GR3” input is closed,

Spindle maximum speed when “GR4” input is closed.

Spindle minimum speed when “GRI” input is closed.

Spindle minimum speed when “GR3”

1 immt is closed.

Spindle minimum speed when “GR4” input is closed.

] Fig, No

v

VI m

Ylll

I

II

Ill

N

The following diagram shows an example of the S5-digit analog outputs when the spindle maximum/minimum speeds are clamped by these parameters:

OUTPUT

+1OV !

I

FOR

SINV INPUT

SPINDLE MOTOR

SPEED OUTPUT

—.

.,-+

,’,/ /“. -

../

,. ,.

,,

‘\

\

\ \ .,

‘\

, n><

.

m

/’

.4

/.

,

/

-..

.

/’ ,.

/ // ., .-

< .-

,

,/’

,-

. .

f ;

GR1 REV

,,-

Iv< v

.-.

- ~,l-.-.

,.

t

,,/[:

.1

r[:~ /

GR2 REV

VI

,.

.

r

G

----

REV

/

0

,

–-”7 ‘“: “ ‘:: ‘x..

OUTPUT FOR

SINV INPUT

\

I

‘.

J

‘\

J

–1OV

+ t

Notes:

1. The spindle motor speed command output is obtained from the following relation:

(Spindle speed command) x (4095 or 10 V)

(4095 or 10 V output speed in spindle gear range determined by GR

1 through GR4 inputs: parameters #6271 through #6274.)

2. With the spindle motor speed motor analog output, the polarity may be inverted by processing M03 (spindle forward rotation) or

M04 (spindle reverse rotation) within the control by using parameter SDASGNI or SDASGN2 (#6006, D6 or D7).

#6006, D6 o

1

0

1

#6006, D7

0 lo

111+1+

1

M03 Output

+

1-1-

M04 Output

+

1: Closed, O: Open

When SINV input is closed, the above polarities are inverted.

26.2.42

GEAR SELECTION COMMAND lNPUT/

OUTPUT (GRL, GRH, GRA, GRB, SF, SFIN) S4-DIGIT

NON-CONTACT OUTPUT OR S5-DIGIT ANALOG

OUTPUT

After executing S command, the control outputs SF signal and checks maximum gear speed designation (parameter #6266 to

#6269) at the same time, and output gear selection command (GRL,

GRH) corresponding to gear speed.

GF

REv

—

.-.

+.,

.

Fig. 20.27

1

SPINDLE

SPEED

COMMAND

The control compares the outputted gear signal with current gear selection and sends back SFIN when they meet.

If they are different, the control performs gear selection sequence.

When the constant speed output is required for gear selection, GRO signal contact is closed.

The control immediately outputs constant speed corresponds to GRO.

Input gear input signal (GRA, GRB) until gear selection is completed and send back spindle gear selection completion signal

(SFIN) on completion of gear selection.

The control outputs specified spindle speed command as non-contact or D/A output.

Send back FIN signal when spindle speed agrees with command.

S COMMAND1

(G RL/GRH)

GEAR SELECTION~ z’;’=

~v

I

Fig. 20.28

\/

‘f---i

I

I

20.2.42

GEAR SELECTION COMMAND lNPUT/

OUTPUT (GRL, GRH, GRA, GRB, SF, SFIN) S4-DIGIT

NON-CONTACT OUTPUT OR S5-DIGIT ANALOG

OUTPUT (Cent’d)

Gesr selection output (GRL, GRH) and Gear selection input (GRA,

GRB) select four types of gear range.

GEAR 1 (CR1)

GEAR 2 (GR2)

GEAR 3 (CR3)

GEAR 4 (GR4)

1: Closed, O:Open

I GRB (H) I GRA (L) o 0 o

1

1

1

0

1

20.2.43

GEAR SHIFT ON (GST) INPUT AND SPIN-

DLE ORIENTATION (SOR) INPUT

These inputs are used to make the S5-digit command analog output and non-contact output provide the outputs other than the part program S command. When GST input is closed, the voltage set by parameter #6270 is outputted.

If SOR input is closed, the spindle speed set to parameter #6275 by the spindle gear range input and spindle motor speed command voltage corresponding to each gear are outputted.

Table 20.14

GST

Input o o

1

1

I

I

I SOR

Input

1

0

I

I

S5-digit Command Analog Voltage

Voltage corresponding to spindle speed command by NC program

I

1

I Voltage corresponding to parameter

#6275.

o

VoItage corresponding to oarameter

#6270.

I

1

I Voltage corresponding to parameter

#6270.

1: Closed, O:Open

Notes :

1. It is possible to make the analog output corresponding to GST, SOR inputs negative by the S5-digit analog output invert (SINV) input.

2. The period of time betweent the setting of GST and SOR inputs and the catching-up of the analog voltage value is shorter than 100 ms.

20.2.44

SINDLE SPEED REACHED (SAGR) INPUT

This input is used to inform, in the case of the S4-digit command, that the spindle speed has reached the specified value at the start of cutting at the execution of the part program in the automatic operation mode. At the start of cutting (when switching from a positioning command to a cutting command takes place), the control delays the time by the value specified in parameter #6224, make sure that SAGR input is closed, and starts cutting.

To perform the operation by SAGR input described above, set parameter #6006 D4 to” 1.“

If it is set to “O,” SAGR input is ignored.

20.2.45

SPINDLE SPEED OVERRIDE (SPA, SPB,

SPC, SPD, SPE) INPUTS

These inputs are used, in the case of the S5-digit analog command or non-contact output, to override the S command in a range of

50% to 120% at the execution of the part program in the automatic operation mode.

o o o o

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

SPA

Input

SPB

Input

1 o o

1

1 o o

1

1: Closed, O:Open

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

SPC

Input

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

Override Corresponding

S Command

50%

60%

70%

80%

90%

100%

110%

120%

It is possible to override the S command in a range of 10 to 200% by option.

Table 20.15

Extension Type Spindle Override

Input Setting and Override o o

1

1 o

SPA SPB SPC SPD SPE

Input Input Input Input Input o o o

0

0

1

0

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

1 1 1

1 1 1

1

0

0

0 o

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

1: Closed, O:Open

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

Override Corresponding to

S Command

10%

20%

3o%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

90%

100%

110%

120%

130%

140%

150%

160%

170%

180%

190%

200%

158

20.2.46

S4-DIGIT COMMAND EXTERNAL OUTPUTS

(SB1 THROUGH SB16) AND S5-DIGIT COMMAND

EXTERNAL OUTPUTS (SDA1 THROUGH SDA16 OR

SDI1 THROUGH SD116)

These inputs and outputs are used, when the control is of S5-digit analog output or non-contact output to output the results of the operation by the S command in the part program to the outside and perform the actual S5-digit command 12-bit non-contact output or analog output according to the inputs from the outside.

(1) S5-Digit Command 12-Bit Non-Contact Output

Output of operation results to outside: SBL through SB 12

(2) S5-Digit Command Analog Output

(a) Output of operation results to outside: SDA1 through SDA16.

Note: The input/output value is signed binary 16-bit.

The relationship with analog voltage is as follows.

I

-32768 to O to +32767

-1OV to Ov to +Iov

1

I

(b) Input from outside for outputting analog voltage to DAS.

SGSO: SDI1 through SDI16.

The primary purpose of this function is to control the S5-digit analog output command or non-contact output command by the sequencer built in the control.

This function should not be used for other purposes unless specifically required.

Operation results are output selectively to the outside directly by NC or via outside inputs, depending on the setting of parameter #6032, D2.

Set

#6032, D2 to” 1” tp output via outside inputs.

20.2.47

EXTERNAL INPUT, VERIFY AND OUTPUT

SIGNALS (EIN, EVER, EOUT, ECLM, IER, EDTS)

These signals are to command input, verification, and output of part programs to the part program memory by means of external signals.

# 13182

I

EOUT _

04

EXTERNAL OUTPUT •1

Z=I==-:EAL

&

# 12236 ‘ EDTS

COM

EDIT CONDITION

Fig. 20.28

(1) External Input (EIN) Input

If the EIN input is closed in label-skip state in the EDIT mode, the function will automatically switch to PROG.

And it will start to store the part program in the part program memory through the input device (or interface) specified by parameter #6003.

Set up the part program to be stored in the following format.

Registration of the program will be executed with the program number (O number) specified at the beginning of the part program.

Program storage ends when the NC reads the EOR code (ER or %) at the end of the program.

Notes :

1. If O number has already been registered, store the program after erasing the existing program wiht the external memory clear

(ECLM) input (see (4) this paragraph).

2.

If parameter #6021 D6= 1, execute storage after erasing the dupIicate O number.

< EIA CODE >

,

r(INDIVIDUAL

1

[0

PROGRAM

NO* PART PROGRAM—

—

I

PROGRAM

-

ER

CR

T T

< ISO COD’E > ~

=

I

~ LF/NL (0 pROGRA~

NUMBER

BLOCK COMMAND)

PART PROGRAM— M30

-F==?

: . . . ..

J--. (OR

M13,2)

,

I

:.

GENERALLY CALLED

OR “END OF BLOCK

“ EOB CODE”

CODE”

I

~ . _ _ -GENERALLY

OR “REWIND

CALLED

STOP

‘lEOR CODE1l

CODE”

M30

4

CR

+

ER

Fig. 20.29

20.2.47

EXTERNAL INPUT, VERIFY AND OUTPUT

SIGNALS (EIN, EVER, EOUT, ECLM, IER, EDTS)

(2) External Verify (EVER) Input and Input Error (IER) Output

If the EVER input is closed in label-skip state in the EDIT mode, the function automatically changes over to PROG.

And it will start to verify the external part program data and the part program data in the part program memory through the input device (or interface) specified by parameter #6003.

Verification is performed on program with the specified O number.

When verifying a series of multiple part programs, execution does not stop at the end of each programs (M02 or M30).

In this case, these data are continuously verified from the beginning EOR code (ER or 910)to the ending EOR code.

If mismatch is found, the input error (IER) output signal is closed. This signal may be cleared and return to open by turning on the external reset (ERS) inputs.

(3) External Output (EOUT) Input

If the EOUT input is closed in label-skip state in the EDIT mode, the function automatically changes over to PROG.

And it will output all part program data stored in the part program memory through the output interface specified by parameter

#6003.

However, specific part program specified by O number cannot be output.

(4) External Memory Clear (ECLM) Input

If the ECLM input is closed in label-skip state in the EDIT mode, the function automatically changes over to PROG.

And it erases all part programs stored in the part program memory.

However, specific part program specified by O number cannot be erased.

(5) Edit Condition (EDTS) Output

If input, verification, output and memory clear are being executed by turning EIN, EVER, EOUT and ECLM inputs on, this EDTS output signal closed.

When execution is completed, this signal is opened again.

(6) Usage Example and The Time Chart

The following procedure is operating sequence during input

(storage), verify and memory operation through an RS-232C interface using a DC code.

(a) Close EDIT mode.

(b) Close external reset (ERS) input.

The program pointer returns to the beginning of the part program currently selected, and label-skip function is effective.

(c) Close external memory clear (ECLM) input.

Function automatically changes over to PROG, and erase all part programs.

The EDTS output is closed during erase condition and return to open when erasing is completed.

(d) Open EDTS signal to open external reset (ERS).

The label-skip function is effective.

(e) Close external input (EIN) signal. EDTS is closed.

i. The control unit turns on request sending signal RS of the RS-

232C interface.

ii. If the NC unit becomes ready for sending, the combined equipment returns capable-of-sending signal CS to the NC unit.

iii. The NC unit sends control code DC 1 through the sending data SD line.

iv. The combined equipment sends part program data to the NC unit through the receving data RD line with DC 1 as the trigger.

v. When the NC reads the EOR code (ER or

‘ZO), control code

DC3 is sent and at the same time request-sending signal RS is turned off.

vi. The combined equipment reads DC3 and, together with stopping sending of data, turns off capable-of sending signal

Cs.

(0 When the above part program storage is completed, the editing condition (EDTS) output is opened.

If not in alarm state, the external reset (ERS) signal is closed.

The label-skip function is effective.

(g) Close external verify (EVER) signal.

Verification between the part program data in NC and the external data is performed with the same operation as in (c)i. to vi, above.

The EDTS output is closed during verify condition and returns to open when verification is completed.

(h) Close memory operation (MEM) mode if not in alarm state.

(i) Close external reset (ERS) signal.

The program pointer returns to the beginning of the part program which has been just verified.

However, when batch verification is executed on a number of part programs, the program pointer returns to the beginning of the 1st part program.

(When desiring to use a part program other than these, use “External Work No. Search” of the “External Data

Input” function.

(j) Close cycle start (ST) input.

Automatic operation of the selected part program is performed.

(k) Automatic operation ends if the necessary FIN signal processing is executed to the M02 or M30 command of the last part program,

Fig. 12.30 shows the time chart of the various signals related above operation.

160

EDIT MODE

MEMORY MODE

EXTERNAL

INPUT

RESET

RESET OUTPUT

EXTERNAL

EXTERNAL

INPUT

EXTERNAL

CLEAR

INPUT

VERIFY

MEMORY

CYCLE START

AUTOMATIC

OPERATION

M02R/M30R

DECODE OUTPUT

MST COMPLETION

RS.2 3 2 C

EDIT CONDITION

I

REQUEST

SENDING

CAPABLE

Cs

SENDING

SENDING

DATA sD

RECEIVING

DATA

RD

~’

.

~DCl DC 3

,;’~

/DC1 ~~

‘@-&&.._

Fig. 20.30

Time Chart External Input and External Verify Input

(7) Precautions

(a) For (6) operations, program number 00000 cannot be used.

(b) As a rule, part programs without a program number cannot be stored. However, the following cases are exceptions.

i. When setting #6207 = O.

This normally be an input error.

If O 0000 is displayed on the

CRT screen, the program is stored in 00000.

ii. When setting #6207 * O.

Stores part program normally with the numerical value set in

#6207 as the program number.

(8) Alarm Status

(a) If the part program memory capacity is exceeded when storing,

“MEMORY OVER’ is displayed on the CRT.

(b) If the mismatch is found when program verifying, the input error (IER) output is closed.

The alarm (ALM) output remains open.

(c) When storing part program, command format checks are not executed.

Format checks are executed during automatic operation and alarm status will be caused by error command.

(d) To reset the alarm status and screen, close the external reset

(ERS) input or depress the RESET key.

(e) EDTS (Edit Condition) can be output not only during input, verify and output of part programs, but also during input, verify and output of offset parameter data.

20.2.48

TOOL LIFE CONTROL SIGNALS (TLCTN,

TLSKP, TLRST, TL4-TL64, TLCHA, TLCHB)

Classify the tools into several groups and specify the tool life by use hours, number of works and use distance for each tool. Specify the tools in each group and when the specified life is reached, select and use the next tool in that same group.

YASNAC J50M

—-1

1

~E

# 13124,TLCTN

I

# 13291

!TLZ

# 13292 TL 4

I

L r

I

-Too’

‘xc”’””

t

# 12054 ITLCHB

NEW TOOL SELECT c i

I

Fig. 20.31

—

—

—

:d

-(

+24V

TOOL COUNT

NEGLECT

20.2.48

TOOL LIFE CONTROL SIGNALS (TLCTN,

TLSKP, TLRST, TL4-TL64, TLCHA, TLCHB) (Cent’d)

(1) Tool Life Neglect Input (TLCTN = #13 124)

Tool life count stop in closing TLCTN signal during tool life control.

Count function is applied only to the opening tool life neglect in the tool life set by time, frequency, or distance.

(2) Tool Skip Input (TLSKP = #13 123)

This input is used when forcing change of a tool before the end of its life. Either (a) or (b) below before operation can be used by changing over parameter #6020 D7.

(a) Close tool skip input TLSKP after externally specifying the group number under the tool. With this operation, the group specified for skipping select the next tool at the next T code command.

(b) Set tool skip input close whithout specifying the group number.

In this case, the current group number is specified.

(3) Tool Exchage Signal (TLCHA = #12055) and Tool Reset

SignalL (TLRST = 13122)

The tool exchange signal (TLCHA) is closed when the life of all tools in one group is reached. In this case, the life count STS information is cleared by externally closing the tool exchange reset signal (TLRST).

NOTE

1. Although the TLCHA signal is output at the point where the end of tool life has been reached (when controlling life with time and distance), cutting continues.

2. The TLCHA signal is a signal that is output when the end of tool has been reached on all tool in one group. Even if tool change reset of a certain group is executed with the TLRST signal, the TLCHA signal remain closed, if there is even one other group in witch the end of tool life has been reached.

3. The TLRST signal is disregarded when it is closed during automatic operation (STL) or during feed hold (SPL).

4. When the TLRST signal is closed, the group in witch information is to be cleared is setting (#6024) or specified by the external input

(TL1-TL64).

Selection of the alternative will be made with parameter #6020D5.

(4) New Tool Selection Signal

(TLCHB = #12054)

When moving to a new tool within one group and, when the

USED display of the new tool number is “O,” the T code of that tool is output together with the new tool selection signal

TLCHB,

Timing is shown in Fig. 20.32.

PARAMETER #6220

Fig. 20.32

(5) Tool Group Number Input

(TL1 - TL64 = #13290 - #13296)

When inputting tool exchange reset signal TLRST and tool skip signal TLSKP, tool group number should be previously specified with tool number signal from TL1 to TL64.

In this case, “the value of the tool group number to be commanded -1” is commanded with a binary number. During tool change reset, the tool group can be specified by setting (#6204) instead of using this vafue as input.

APPENDIX A DIMENSIONS in mm

(1) CNC Unit (Type JZNC-JRKOO)

10 184

4

*

163

APPENDIX A DIMENSIONS in mm (Cent’d)

170

———

170

(

———

A

\l

P

10

IIL

PANEL CUTOUT

8-M’3

TAPPED HOLES

170

-1

511

170 170

520

I 170

(3) Horizontal Type CRT Operator’s Panel (Type JZNC-JOP02)

8-4 DIA MTG HOLES

/ ~1

?6

1

)

220

1

227

—

9@

164

130

+

270

130

8-M3 ll&D”-

I

130

PANEL CUTOUT

130

(4) Tape Reader Unit (Model 2801)

CONNECTOR

TYPE DB-25S

FOR EXTERNAL

SIGNALS

t

160*U.~

-1

4-45 DIA

MTG HOLES

-. ..-.

PANtL

. .

CUTOUT

I

II I :1 :1 II------III—-+11 VI I El

MANUA~FEEDSVWTCti &x

165

APPENDIX A DIMENSIONS in mm (Cent’d)

(5) Servo Units

(a) Types SGDB-05 to 15AD

Drawing No.: 9406975

(a) Types SGDB-20 to 30AD

Drawing No.: 9406975

METALFl~lNG

DF9401344-1

.

PACKING

(it)

—

_ 117

135

*

.

9Z

!—_

(1):

—

METAL

, FITTING

‘PAKING

Approx mass: 5 kg

Metal Fitting

Mount the metal fittings to the SERVOPACK.

/

FOR SGDB-05 TO 15

FOR SGDB-20 TO 30

DF9401 344-1

DF9401 345-1

2-M4 X 10 ROUND HEAD SCREWS

(WITH SPRING WASHERS)

(WIDTH

IWIDTH

110)

135)

‘ d

Approx mass: 5 kg

Packings A and B

After mounting the metal fittings, apply packings A and

PACKING B

FOR SGDB-05 TO 15

/

FOR SGDB-20 TO 30

DF9401 357-1 (WIDTH 1101

DF9401 357-2 (WIDTH 1351

,/’”

,/.

,/’ETAL

/_ FITTING

—.,

‘\

PACKING

A ‘j

PACKING

(COMMON

B DF9401 358 (3 5 x 245)

FOR SGDB -05 TO 301

‘\–”n!

* ‘\

,

PAKING

//

\

PAKING A

166

(6) Noise Filter (Types LF31O, LF320, LF330)

Drawing No.: DE8302999

4-45 DIA

MTG HOLI

6-M4 SCREWS (LE

6-M6 SCREWS (LF-

+ t

?

—

@ E

Q K

3

+

I

IIL

Iw -

Approx ~mass: 2.3 kg (LF-320, 330)

1.9 kg (LF-3 10)

.Noise Filter (Type LF340)

Drawing No.: DE 8303000

+

120

135

150

176 ILF-320, 330) 170 (LF-31O)

J

4-6; DIA MTG HOLES

1-

L

?

Approx. mass: 5 kg

200

220

240

260

1-

1

+

+

—

+-

—

80

O.E

167

APPENDIX A DIMENSIONS in

mm (Cent’d)

(7)

Power Supply Unit for Brake (Types LPDE-lHO1, LPSE-2H01)

5011.969)

30

(1.181)

. Lead Length : 500 mm for each

●

Lead Color e

2-3 DIA MTG HOLES

(SPOT FACING 5.5 DIA, 4 LONGI

●

Ambient Temperature : 60 ~ max.

+?+ [--,

●

Internal Circuit for 100VAC

DIOOE

BRIOGE

BLUE (>

-

AC SIOE 1

WHITE (>

i ) REO

‘ :~JBRAKE)

T

BLACK

●

WHITE

L---

Internal Circuit for 200VAC

YELLOW

AC SIOE 1

DIOOE

SURGE m

Gi03E SUffiE

SUFRES9R

-2

REO

, :~:BRAKEl

BLACK

Note :

1. It is recommended that turning on or off of the brake power circuit be performed at the AC side.

For turning on or off at the DC side, provide the surge suppressor near the brake coils so as not to break the brake coils by surge voltage.

●

Specifications

Type

LPDE- 1HO1

LPSE-2H01

Rectifier System

Single-phase half wave

Single-phasefull wave

Frequency

Hz

50/60

50/60

AC Input

Voltage V

180 to 230

90 to 120

DC Output

Voltage V

90

90

DC Output

Cument A

1

1

Approx

Mass kg

0.1

0.1

(8) Manual Pulse Generator

(Type PREH-2E5T/100-M) lrFiYVEpLATE

TERMINAL LAYOUT k+?

[Fi%%!%3

~d

NAMEPLATE

3’- M4 X 0.7

~~-

TERMINAL LAYOUT

3-5 DiA HOLES

MTG HOLE

DRILLING PLAN n

(9) Spindle Pulse Generator

(a) Types PC-1024ZL-4K-1, PC-1024ZL-6K1

Drawing No.: DE6429539

—

—

UO.TP.TTERMINAL

TYPE MS31 02A

20

30

20-29P

2

4- M3x0.5

. Specifications

Power Supply

Number of Pulses

Max Response Speed

Operation Temperature

+5 VDCk5%,350m Amax

A-and B-phases: 1024p/rev

C-phase: lp/rev

4k: 4000 r/rein

6k: 6000 r/rein

Oto + 60”C

Output Terminals

Input Shaft Inertia

Type MS3 102A, 20-29P

1X 10-3kg cm .52 max

Input Starting Torque lkg cm max

Allowable Input Thrust Load At stop: 10 kg max, At rotating: 2 kg max

Shaft Load

Radial Load At stop: 20 kg max, At rotating: 3 kg max

Approx Mass 1.5 kg

. Output Terminal Layout

A

B c

D

E

F

PA

Pc

PB

FG

G

H

J

K

L

M

+5V

Ov

R s

N

P

T x PA

* Pc

* PB

APPENDIX A DIMENSIONS in mm

(Cent’d)

(b) Types PC-1024ZL-4K-68, PC-1024ZL-6K-68

Drawing No.: DE6429540

——

— u

%

+---

4-5.4

DIA

MTG HOLES

/ 1

=

170

. %ecifications

ThrustLoad At stop 10kgmax.Atrotating2 kgmax

Atstop 20kgmax Atrotating:3 kgmax

. output Terminal Layout

-==

(c) Types PC-1024ZL-4K-16O, PC-1024ZL-6K-16O

Drawing No.: DE6429541

1.15::”4 z

Ill

4-10.2

DIA

HOLES

h-

. Specifications

OUTPUT

;;;~lNAL

MSSI 02A

20-29P

11

5

+5 VDC +5’%, 350 mA mm

A. and B-phase 1024 plrev

I

*

160

~W

l%mst Load

Radial Load

At stop 10 kg max, At rotating 2 kg ma.

At stop 20 kg max. At rotating 3 kg ma.

.

Output

Terminal Layout

J

APPENDIX B

(1) 1/0 A~~~ clm~flc~ion

1/0 area numbers of rotary switch are shown below.

Sw 1

Table A.1 1/0 Area Classification

I 1/0 Area No.

SP 50

Setting ineffective

FC 861

,

,.

Setting ineffective

FC 810/

FC 860

,..

Setting ineffective

1-1 I 1-1 11

6

7

8

9 to

F

4

5

0

1

2

3

3-1

3-2

4-1

4-2

3-1

3-2

4-1

4-2

Setting ineffective

3

Setting ineffective

4

Setting ineffective

(2) Address Classification

Address classifications of SP 50, FC 861, FC 810 and FC 860 are shown below.

SP 50

Table A.2 Input Port

Fe 861 / FC8,WFC860

Area

No.

1-1

1-2

2-1

2-2

3-1

3-2

4-1

4-2

#;;31

#1032

# $39

#lo40

#;:47

#1048

#::55

#1056

#l&63

Address

Port

#1000

#;:07

#1008

#&5

#1016

# ;;23

# 1024

2-2

3-1

3-2

4-1

4-2

Area

No.

1-1

1-2

Address

Port

#looo

#11’07

#1008 to

#lo15

+

#1016

2-1

#1 024 -1-

#1032

# 1040

#l&47

#1048

#1:55

+

#1056

4

Area

No.

1

Address

Port

#looo to

#lo13

#1016 to

#1029

#1032 to

#lo45

#1048 to

#1061

Table A.3 Output Port

Area

No.

1-1

1-2

SP 50-1

Address

Port

#1

100

#Ro3

#1 108

#fill

I SP 50-2 I FC 861 I FC 810/FC 860

I I

I

I Area

No.

Address

Port

I Area

No.

1

Address

Port

I Area

No.

Address

Port

#lloo

1-1

#1 100

1-1

#lloo

# l?06

#l?06

1 to

#1108 #1 108

1-2 1-2 #1111

#l?14

#R14

#1116

2-1

#1116

2-1 2-1

#1116

#t?19

#1124

#l?22

#1 124

2-2

2

#1116 to

#1127 2-2 2-2

# :22

#1 124

3-1

#l?27

#1132 to

#1135

I

i

3-1

#l?30

#l 132

#l?38

3-1

#l?30

#l 132

#~38

3

#1 132 to

#1 140 #1 140 #1 140

#1143 3-2 3-2 3-2

#l?43

#1 148

!

#l?46

#lt;46

4-1 4-1

#l?51

#1 156

#l 148 to

#1 159

4-2 4-2

#l?59

(3) Invert Process

Logic can be set to “ 1” by shofi-pin SW2 settingofFC810, FC860, FC861 when the input contact is “closed” disregarding whether common

OV or 24V is used.

The following shows the inverted bit areas in the common status of each board,

Table A.4 Inverted Bit Area

Common

Connector

Terminal

COM 30

COM 31

COM 32

COM 40

COM 41

COM 42

COM 20

COM 21

COM 10

Area No.1

-

#looo , #lool

#loo2, #loo3

#loo4

#1005, #1006

#1007, #1008

#loo9

#lolo, #loll

#lo12

#lo13

FC810/FC860 INterval Area

Area No. 2 Area No. 3

#1016 , #1017 #1032, #1033

#1018, #1019 #lo34 , #lo35

#loo4

#lo21, #lo22

#1023, #1024

#loo4

#1026, #1027

#1028

#loo4

#1037, #1038

#lo39, #lo40

#loo4

#1042, #1043

#1044

#1029 #lo45

Area No. 4

#1048, #1049

#lo50, #lo51

#loo4

#lo53, #lo54

#1055, #1056

#loo4

#1058, #1059

#1060

#1061

Common

Connector

Terminal

COM 00

COM 01

COM 02

COM 03

COM 04

COM 00

COM 01

COM 02

COM 03

COM 04

Area No. 1-1

#looo, #lool

#loo2

#loo3, #loo4

#loo5

#1006, #1007

Area No. 3-1

#1032, #1033

#lo34

#1035, #1036

#lo37

#1038, #1039

Table A.5 Inverted Bit Area

I

FC 810/FC 860 Inverted Area

Area No. 1-2 \ Area No. 2-1

#1016, #1017 #1008, #1009

#lolo #1018

#loll, #lo12

#lo13

#lo14, #lo15

Area No. 3-2

#lo40, 1041

#lo42

#lo43, #lo44

#lo45

#1046, #1047

#1019 , #1020

#lo21

#1022, #1023

Area No. 4-1

#1048, #1049

#lo50

#1051, #1052

#lo53

#lo54, #lo55

I Area No. 2-2

#1024, #1025

#1026

#1027, #1028

#1029

#lo30, #lo31

Area No. 4-2

#1056, #1057

#1058

#1059, #1060

#1061

#1062, #1063

173

APPENDIX C STANDARD WIRING COLORS OF YASNAC

The standard wiring colors of YASNAC are as follows:

Items

Circuit

Main Circit

200 VAC

100 VAC

Control Circuit (100 VAC )

+5 V, 24 V

DC Power

Circuit Ov

I

DC Signal

Line

0.2 SG

Other than 0.2 SG

Ground Wire I

1

1

I

Wiring

I

Green

I Black

Yellow

Yellow

Red

Black

Gray

Brown

Green / Yellow

174

m

YASNAC J50

CONNECTING MANUAL

TOKYO OFFICE Ohtemachl

Phone (03) 3284-9111 Telex

Bldg, 1-6-1 Ohlemachl,

YASKAWA J33530

Chlyoda-ku, Tokyo,

Fax (03) 3284-9034

100 Japan

YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA,

Chicago-Corporate Headquatiers

Phone (708)

MOTOMAN

291-0411

INC.

INC.

2942 MacArthur

Phone (708) 291-2340

Chicago-Technical Center

Fax (708) 498-2430

3160 MacArthur

Fax (708) 291-1018

Blvd

Blvd N orthbrook,

Northbrook,

IL 60062-2028,

IL 60062-1917, U S A

805 Liberty Lane West Carrollton,

Phone (513) 847-6200

OH 45449,

Fax (513) 847-6277

U S A

YASKAWA EL~TRICO DO BRASIL COM=RCIO

Rua Conde Do Plnhal 8-S, Andar Sala 51 CEP

LTDA.

OISOI-%0

Bras[l

Phone (011) 35-1911 Fax (011) 37-7375

YASKAWA

Am Kronberger

Phone

ELECTRIC EUROPE GmbH

Hang

(49) 6!96-569-300

2, 65824 Schwalbach, Germany

Fax (49) 6196-888-301

Motoman Robotics AB

Box 130 S-38500

Phone 0486-10575

Tors5s, Sweden

Fax 0486-11410

Motoman Robotec GmbH

Kammerfeldstrape 1, 85391 Allershausen,

Phone 08166-900

YASKAWA ELECTRIC

Fax 08166-9039

UK LTD.

Germany

3 Drum MaIns Park Orchardton

Phone (1236)735000

Woods

Fax (1236)458182

Cum bernauld, Scotland

YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION

G68 9LD U K

U S A

Pa[k Nam Bldg 901188-3, l-Ga Eulpro, Joong-Gu

Phone (02)776-7844 Fax (02)753-2639

Service Center

Phone 276-7407

:221 Henderson

Fax 276-7406

Seoul, Korea

YASKAWA

Head Office

Phone

ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD.

CPF Bldg,

221-7530 Telex

79 Robinson

(87) 24890

Road

YASKAWA

# 13-05, Singapore

RS Fax 224-5854

0106, SINGAPORE

Road, # 07-20 Henderson Bwldlng Singapore 0315, SINGAPORE

YATEC ENGINEERING CORPORATION

Shen Hslang Tang Sung Chlang Bu!ldlng

IOF 146 Sung Chlang Road, Tape, Taiwan

Phone [02) 563-0010

SHANGHAI OFFICE

Fax (02) 567-4677

Room ‘No 8B Wan Zhong Bulld!ng

1303 Yan An Road (West), Shanghai 200050, CHINA

Phone (86) 212-1015

TAIPEI OFFICE Shen

Fax (86) 212-1015

Hslang Tang Sung Chlang Bulldlng 10F 146 Sung Chiang Road, Talpel, Taiwan

Phone (02) 563-0010 Fax (02) 567-4677

Y

YASKAWA

YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION

Due to ormnng prcd.ct m&lfiat/on/improvement, data subjsct to change wth..f

nooce

TOE-C843-I 2.2B

0 Printed in Japan September 199594-9 (